683274
205
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/258
Pagina verder
BIE-7243-000
Before Reading
the Operation Guide
This notice describes new functions and specification
change with the latest firmware, and the latest
information such as changes to the "Operation Guide"
on P. ii to P. xvi.
"Before Reading the Operation Guide"
Checking and Updating the Firmware Version..................................................................P. ii
New Functions and Specification Changes..........................................................................P. iii
Information on Other Changes ....................................................................................................P. xiii
"Operation Guide".........................................................................................................................................P. 1
Notice on New Functions and Changes
Updating to the latest firmware enables new functions and
specification changes. For information on checking the firmware
version and updating the firmware, see the next page.
Operation Guide
For those already using this product
For the latest information of the firmware update,
please read P. ii to P. xvi.
For those using this product for the first time
Please read P. ii to P. xvi in conjunction with P. 1 and
onwards of the "Operation Guide".
ii
Use the Camera Management Tool to check and update the firmware version of the camera.
Download the latest firmware from the Canon website and update the firmware of the camera, as required.
For details on using the Camera Management Tool, please refer to "Camera Management Tool User Manual".
Latest Firmware Versions
* The difference between VB-H45 and VB-H45B, as well as VB-M44 and VB-M44B is the external color only.
The "Operation Guide" is written for firmware versions earlier than those indicated in the above table.
Please read the following pages for information on the new functions and specification changes of the latest firmware
version.
Checking and Updating the Firmware Version
Camera Model Firmware Version
VB-H45, VB-H45B*, VB-M44, VB-M44B*
1.1.x
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II, VB- S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II, VB-S900F Mk II
VB-S805D Mk II, VB-S905F Mk II
VB-S30VE, VB-S800VE, VB-S910F 1.1.x
VB-R13VE, VB-R13, VB-R11VE, VB-R11
1.2.x
VB-R12VE, VB-R10VE
VB-M50B
VB-H652LVE, VB-H651VE, VB-H651V
VB-M641VE, VB-M641V, VB-M640VE, VB-M640V
VB-H761LVE-H, VB-H761LVE, VB-H760VE
VB-H751LE-H, VB-H751LE
VB-M741LE-H, VB-M741LE, VB-M740E
iii
Target Models
The new functions and specification changes of the new firmware are indicated below.
Screenshots on this notice may differ from the actual screens, depending on the model you are using.
: Supported with the latest firmware : Already supported
New Functions and Specification Changes
New Functions and Specification Changes
Target Models
VB-H45, VB-M44
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II
VB-S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II
VB-S900F Mk II
VB-S805D Mk II
VB-S905F Mk II
VB-S30VE
VB-S800VE
VB-S910F
VB-R13VE, VB-R13
VB-R11VE, VB-R11
VB-R12VE, VB-R10VE
VB-M50B, VB-H652LVE
VB-H651VE, VB-H651V
VB-M641VE, VB-M641V
VB-M640VE, VB-M640V
VB-H761LVE-H, VB-H761LVE
VB-H760VE, VB-H751LE-H
VB-H751LE, VB-M741LE-H
VB-M741LE, VB-M740E
Operating Environment:
Updating the PC environment/mobile device
information
 P. v
Configuring Initial Camera Settings:
Administrator account registration added
 *
4
P. vi
Camera Viewer:
[One-shot AF] button added*
1
 P. vii
Setting Page:
Entering the confirmation password for the
authorized user
 P. vii
Setting Page:
[Simple Camera Settings] recommended values
changed and performance improved
 P. viii
Setting Page:
Preset selection added to the [ADSR] and
[Privacy Mask] settings*
2
 P. ix
Setting Page:
Number of input characters for [On-screen display]
changed
 P. x
Setting Page:
Items added to [General Audio]*
3
 P. x
Setting Page:
Changed the saving items when initializing
 P. xi
Factory Default Settings:
Setting values changed (IPv4, Administrator
Account, Focus)
 *
5
P. xii
Factory Default Settings:
Setting values changed (DNS, Camera Name, Day/
Night, Memory Card Operations)
 P. xii
iv
*1 Only for models with the auto focus function
*2 Only for models with optical zoom
*3 Only for models with the audio transmission/reception function
*4 Only for VB-R11VE, VB-R11, VB-R10VE, VB-M641VE, VB-M641V, VB-M640VE, VB-M640V, VB-M741LE-H, VB-M741LE, and
VB-M740E
*5 IPv4, Administrator Account:
Only for VB-R11VE, VB-R11, VB-R10VE, VB-M641VE, VB-M641V, VB-M640VE, VB-M640V, VB-M741LE-H, VB-M741LE, and
VB-M740E
Focus:
Only for VB-H651VE, VB-H651V, VB-M641VE, VB-M641V, VB-M640VE, and VB-M640V
Factory Default Settings:
Setting values changed (User Authority)
 P. xii
Setting Name:
Displaying of bit rate control
 P. xii
New Functions and Specification Changes
Target Models
VB-H45, VB-M44
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II
VB-S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II
VB-S900F Mk II
VB-S805D Mk II
VB-S905F Mk II
VB-S30VE
VB-S800VE
VB-S910F
VB-R13VE, VB-R13
VB-R11VE, VB-R11
VB-R12VE, VB-R10VE
VB-M50B, VB-H652LVE
VB-H651VE, VB-H651V
VB-M641VE, VB-M641V
VB-M640VE, VB-M640V
VB-H761LVE-H, VB-H761LVE
VB-H760VE, VB-H751LE-H
VB-H751LE, VB-M741LE-H
VB-M741LE, VB-M740E
v
Operating Environment
The operating environment for the latest firmware is described below.
PC Environment Details
*1 Cannot be started from the Windows start screen
*2 Does not support playback of Video (H.264) or audio transmission/reception
CPU
(Recommended)
Intel Core i7-2600 or higher
Graphics Board
(Recommended)
Not specified
Memory
(Recommended)
2 GB or higher
Viewer Display
(Recommended)
1920 x 1080 or higher
OS and
Compatible Web
Browser
Windows 7 Ultimate/Windows 7 Professional/Windows 7
Enterprise/Windows 7 Home Premium SP1 32/64-bit
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit,
Chrome 65*
2
Windows 8.1/Windows 8.1 Pro/Windows 8.1 Enterprise
32/64-bit*
1
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit,
Chrome 65*
2
Windows 10 Pro/Windows 10 Enterprise/Windows 10
Education/Windows 10 Home 32/64-bit
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit,
Microsoft Edge*
2
, Chrome 65*
2
Windows Server 2008 Standard SP2 32/64-bit Internet Explorer 9 32-bit
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard SP1 64-bit Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit,
Chrome 65*
2
Windows Server 2012 Standard 64-bit*
1
Internet Explorer 10 32/64-bit,
Chrome 65*
2
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit*
1
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit,
Chrome 65*
2
Windows Server 2016 Standard 64-bit Internet Explorer 11 64-bit,
Chrome 65*
2
Must be configured to allow use of JavaScript, IFRAME (html tag), and web storage
For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled
Operating System
Language
Setting Page, Camera Viewer, Mobile Camera Viewer:
German/English/Spanish/French/Italian/Polish/Russian/Turkish/Thai/Korean/
Chinese (Simplified) /Japanese
vi
Verified Mobile Devices (Setting Page, Camera Viewer, Mobile Camera Viewer)
As of April 2018
*1 Does not support playback of Video (H.264) or audio transmission/reception
*2 Setting Page and Camera Viewer are not supported
Configuring Initial Camera Settings
The fields for [Administrator Account] are now blank as a default. When restoring the factory default settings after updating
the firmware, it is necessary to set [Administrator Name] and [Password] to access the camera for the first time. This change
has been made in firmware version 1.1.8 or later.
When using the Camera Management Tool to configure the initial settings, see "Camera Management Tool User Manual".
Mobile Devices OS Compatible Web Browser
Surface 3
Windows 10 Home 64-bit Internet Explorer 11, Microsoft Edge*
1
Must be configured to allow use of JavaScript, and web storage
For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled
iPad Pro 12.9-inch
iPad Pro 10.5-inch
iPhone 7*
2
iPhone 8 Plus*
2
iPhone X*
2
iOS 10.3.3
iOS 11.3
Safari*
1
Must be configured to allow use of JavaScript, IFRAME (html tag), and web storage
For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled
Nexus 9 Android 7.1.1 Chrome 65*
1
Galaxy Tab S 8.4 Android 4.4.2 Chrome 65*
1
Nexus 6P*
2
Android 8.1 Chrome 65*
1
Galaxy S8*
2
Android 8.0 Chrome 65*
1
The default screen displayed when accessing from the web browser for the first time
vii
Camera Viewer
Adjusting Video > Focusing
One-shot AF operations are now also possible in the Camera Viewer.
[One-shot AF] button
Use when [Focus] is set to [Manual]. When you click , the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch
to manual.
Setting Page
[Basic] > [User Management]
It is now necessary to enter a confirmation password when setting the password for an authorized user.
[Confirm Password]
Enter the same password as above for confirmation.
Important
For precautions on focusing and the focus range, please refer to "Operation Guide".
viii
[Camera] > [Initial Settings]
Recommended values have been changed for [Exposure], [Shutter Speed Limit (Lower)], [Shutter Speed Limit
(Upper)], and [Shutter Speed], which are displayed when [Motion Priority] in [Simple Camera Settings] is selected.
The notes regarding [Motion Priority] and [Depth Priority] in [Simple Camera Settings] have been changed according
to the improved performance.
[Simple Camera Settings]
Type Motion Priority
[Exposure] Auto
[Shutter Speed Limit (Lower)] 1/1000 (sec.)
[Shutter Speed Limit (Upper)] 1/16000 (sec.)
[Shutter Speed] -
Important
Note the following regarding [Simple Camera Settings].
[Motion Priority]
Flickering may occur due to fluorescent lighting, etc.
In low-light conditions, video may become comparatively darker than [Standard Settings], and noise may increase.
[Depth Priority]
In low-light conditions, video may become comparatively darker than [Standard Settings], and noise may increase.
ix
[Video and Audio] > [ADSR] / [Video and Audio] > [Privacy Mask]
When changing the camera angle in the settings for specifying the ADSR area and privacy mask area, presets can now
be selected from a preset selection box in addition to slider operations.
x
[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for [Text string display] has been increased to 40 when
[Display designated string] is selected in [Text display].
Note
Setting the [Text display], [Date display], and [Time display] to the same position may result in not displaying all of the
information. In such case, items set with [Upper right] or [Lower right] for [Position of text display] are prioritized for display.
All of the texts may not be displayed depending on the video size, text length, and text position. Check the display after changing
the video size and on-screen display settings.
[Video and Audio] > [Audio]
Whether to use [Audio Input], and [Audio Communication Method] can now be selected. [Current Volume Level] can
become displayed for audio input.
[Audio Input]
Select whether to use audio input from the microphone. If you select [Enable], you can use functions related to audio
input such as [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] or [Event] > [Audio Detection] > [Volume
Detection Event].
If you select [Disable] and click [Apply], the following settings are locked and audio input functions are disabled.
[Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] > [Disable]
[Server] > [RTP Server] > [RTP Stream 1] - [RTP Stream 5] > [Audio Transmission] > [Disable]
[Event] > [Audio Detection] > [Volume Detection] > [Volume Detection Event] > [Disable]
[Event] > [Audio Detection] > [Scream Detection] > [Scream Detection Event] > [Disable]
[Current Volume Level]
When [Audio Input] is set to [Enable], the current volume level is displayed on the status bar.
[Audio Communication Method]
Select the audio transmission/reception method.
xi
[Half Duplex]
You can prevent howling that occurs when the microphone and speaker are placed nearby. However, there is no
sound sent from the camera to the viewer while the camera is receiving audio from the viewer or while an audio file
is being played back. Therefore, even if the [Audio Reception] button of the viewer is active (purple), audio input
from the microphone cannot be received.
[Full Duplex]
Audio can be transmitted from the camera to the viewer even while the camera is receiving audio from the viewer.
[Maintenance] > [General]
The underlined items are now saved when [Initialization] > [Network Settings] > [Save] is selected.
[Network Settings]
If you set this to [Save], the following settings are retained when initializing.
Administrator Name
Administrator Password
•Network Settings
•NTP Server
•HTTP Server
Host Access Restrictions
•Time Zone
•Certificates
•Private Key
•IPsec
If you set this to [Do not save], the above settings are also initialized.
Since the administrator account is also initialized, you will become unable to connect to the camera. Use the Camera
Management Tool to configure the initial settings.
[Maintenance] > [Update Firmware]
When selecting [Update Firmware] > [Restore Default Settings] > [Restore], items to save are also changed as in the
previous paragraph [Initialization] > [Network Settings] > [Save].
xii
List of Factory Default Settings
The setting values for the factory default settings are changed as indicated below.
Note
Since cameras with the factory default settings are configured to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server, detect the camera by
Camera Management Tool using a DHCP environment or an IPv6 environment. If you configure the settings using other
environments, please refer to "Operation Guide" > "Setting up the network without a DHCP server".
Setting Name Changes
Note
Setting names other than the following may also have been changed, depending on the model you are using.
The setting name of [Bit Rate Control] has been changed in [Basic] > [Video] > [H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)].
[Use bit rate control] changed to [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)]
[Do not use bit rate control] changed to [Do not use bit rate control (variable bit rate)]
Item Before Change After Change
•IPv4
IPv4 Address Settings Method
Manual Auto (DHCP)
•DNS
Set Name Server Address Automatically
Disable Use DHCP/DHCPv6
Administrator Account
Administrator Name
Password
With setting values Without setting values
User Authority
Guest User Camera Control
Video distribution and
Camera control
No access privileges
User Authority
Guest User Audio Distribution
Yes No
Camera Name
Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)
Camera Model Name (Example) VB-M50B
Camera Settings
Focus
Manual Auto
Camera Settings
Day/Night
Day Mode Auto
Memory Card Operations
Overwrite videos
Disable Enable
xiii
In addition to the changes due to the firmware update, the following changes have also been made to the descriptions in
the "Operation Guide".
The target models for these changes are indicated below.
* Excluding hydrophilic coating models
Discontinuation of the RM Series
The Network Video Recording Software RM Series has been discontinued.
The RM-Lite video recording software is no longer provided.
Information on Other Changes
Changed Information
Target Models
VB-H45, VB-M44
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II
VB-S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II
VB-S900F Mk II
VB-S805D Mk II
VB-S905F Mk II
VB-S30VE
VB-S800VE
VB-S910F
VB-R13VE, VB-R13
VB-R11VE, VB-R11
VB-R12VE, VB-R10VE
VB-M50B, VB-H652LVE
VB-H651VE, VB-H651V
VB-M641VE, VB-M641V
VB-M640VE, VB-M640V
VB-H761LVE-H, VB-H761LVE
VB-H760VE, VB-H751LE-H
VB-H751LE, VB-M741LE-H
VB-M741LE, VB-M740E
Discontinuation of the RM Series  P. xiii
Discontinuation of the Setup CD-ROM P. xiv
Cleaning the Camera  *P.xiv
Revision to the Operation Guide:
Privileges Required for Operating the Camera
Viewer
 P. xv
Revision to the Operation Guide:
[Video Record] > [Upload]
 P. xv
Revision to the Operation Guide:
[Event] > [Timer]
 P. xv
Revision to the Operation Guide:
Troubleshooting
 P. xvi
Revision to the Operation Guide:
Viewer Messages
 P. xvi
Revision to the Operation Guide:
List of Factory Default Settings
P. xvi
xiv
Discontinuation of the Setup CD-ROM
The setup CD-ROM has no longer been included with the camera.
The distribution of files such as the software, user manuals, and License Agreement of Software that were stored on the
setup CD-ROM has been changed as indicated below.
*1 Only for models and languages that are supported by the On-screen Display Assist Tool
*2 Only for models with the audio transmission/reception function
Cleaning the Camera
When cleaning the dome cover, top cover, and lens protector, follow the procedure below instead of that indicated in
"Operation Guide" > " Cleaning the Exterior".
Cleaning the Dome Cover, Top Cover, and Lens Protector
1 Wash off foreign substances such as dust and sand using clean water*.
* Since indoor cameras (VB-H730F Mk II, VB-S30D Mk II, VB-S800D Mk II, VB-S805D Mk II, VB-R13, VB-R11, VB-H651V,
VB-M641V, and VB-M640V) cannot be directly washed with water, wipe them clean with a soft cloth that has been
dampened with clean water.
2 Gently wipe away any fingerprints or oil, etc. that cannot be removed with water only using a soft cloth dampened
with neutral detergent that has been diluted to a factor of about 1% with water.
3 Wipe them clean with a soft cloth that has been dampened with clean water to ensure that water droplets and
detergent do not remain.
Note
For users of the hydrophilic coating models (VB-H761LVE-H, VB-H751LE-H, and VB-M741LE-H):
Please refer to "About Hydrophilic Coating Models", included with the camera, as to cleaning the camera, and do not follow the
instruction above.
Type Name Distribution
Software
Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite No longer provided
Camera Management Tool
Download from the Canon website
Installer name: VBToolsInstall.exe
Recorded Video Utility
On-screen Display Assist Tool*
1
License
License Agreement of Software
Open Source Software
Displayed on the Setting Page
[Maintenance] > [General] >
[Tool] > [View License]
User manual
Operation Guide
Download from the Canon website
Specifications
Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide
Camera Management Tool User Manual
Recorded Video Utility User Manual
On-screen Display Assist Tool User Manual*
1
Sample audio files Sound samples*
2
Important
Never wipe them clean with a cloth, etc. without first removing foreign substances such as dust and sand.
Doing so may damage the dome cover, top cover, and lens protector.
xv
Revision to the Operation Guide
Privileges Required for Operating the Camera Viewer
The following menu and buttons can be used even if all the privileges of an authorized user or a guest user are
disabled.
[Main] Menu
– [Language] Button
– [Switch Users]
– [Settings Page]
– [Mobile Camera Viewer]
[Reconnect] Button
Information Display
[Video Record] > [Upload]
The following "Important" text has been deleted.
[Event] > [Timer]
The description of timer events has been revised.
[24-Hour Continuous Settings]
When set to [Enable], and [Repeat Interval] is set to an option other than [None], the timer event will be repeated at
the interval specified in [Repeat Interval], irrespective of the [Start Time] setting. If [Repeat Interval] is set to [None], the
timer event will be triggered only at the time set in [Start Time].
Note that when set to [Enable], only [Video Record] operations can be performed.
Important
If the destination for HTTP or FTP upload, or e-mail notification is set for a Windows operating system, IPsec communication is not
supported.
xvi
© CANON INC. 2018
Troubleshooting
Countermeasures have been added for the following problems.
* Only for models with the audio transmission/reception function
List of Viewer Messages > Warning Message
The description has been revised for the following item.
List of Factory Default Settings
The setting value has been revised for the following item.
Problem Countermeasures
Cannot connect to the camera.
Video is not displayed.
There is no audio.*
The viewer gets disconnected.
Configure to exclude the camera, or the software where the problem occurred,
in your security software.
The Camera Viewer will not launch.
Use one of the following procedures, when you launch the Camera Viewer and a
file block security warning is displayed because of an unverified publisher.
Launch the Camera Viewer after executing Windows Update to the latest
version, when using the camera in an internet connection environment.
Download the root certificate installer from the Canon download site on a
connectable computer and install it in the target environment, when in an
environment not connectable to the internet.
Cannot use some functions of the
Camera Viewer.
Follow the procedure in "Adding the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site" in the
"Operation Guide" to add this website to [Trusted sites] in the [Security] settings,
and disable the protected mode for the trusted sites (when not using Windows
Server, also disable the protected mode in a similar manner).
If you are using a web browser other than Internet Explorer or if the Canon
Network Camera Addon Module is not correctly installed when using Internet
Explorer, the following functions cannot be used.
Receiving/transmitting audio*
Receiving/playing H.264 video
Message Explanation
ActiveX is disabled.
ActiveX is disabled in the web browser settings or system functions
cannot be accessed from ActiveX due to security settings.
Even though ActiveX is enabled, if this message is displayed in the
environment where the proxy server is used, select [Control Panel] >
[Network and Internet] > [Internet options] > the [Connections] tab > [LAN
settings] > the [Use a proxy server for your LAN] checkbox in [Proxy server]
> select [Advanced] > specify the camera IP address in [Exceptions].
Item Setting
Camera Settings
Shutter Speed
1/100
This User Manual should be read before using the network camera.
Network Camera
Operation Guide
/
/
/
/
2
Thank you for purchasing a Canon Network Camera (hereafter referred to as the camera)*.
The camera is for indoor use only.
This “Operation Guide” explains the camera settings and operations. Read this guide carefully before using the camera to
ensure correct use.
* The cameras described in this manual may include models not available in your country and/or region.
For the latest information on this product (firmware and software, user manuals, operating environment, etc.), please refer to
the Canon website.
Precautions for Use (Disclaimer)
Disclaimer
To the full extent permitted by laws and regulations, neither Canon Inc. nor any of its subsidiaries or affiliates shall be
responsible for any financial losses that may be incurred as a result of the loss of recorded information or images,
regardless of the internal or external cause of the loss.
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING THE CAMERA AND WITHOUT
DETRACTING FROM ANY RIGHTS A CONSUMER MAY BE ENTITLED TO, AND TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED
BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS: (1) NEITHER CANON INC. NOR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES MAKE
ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THE MATERIAL IN THIS MANUAL OR
WITH REGARD TO THE USE OF THE CAMERA INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR NON-
INFRINGEMENT AND (2) NEITHER CANON INC. NOR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES SHALL BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL OR THE CAMERA.
Network Security
The user is responsible for the network security of this product and its use.
Take appropriate network security measures to avoid security breaches. To the full extent permitted by laws and
regulations, neither Canon Inc. nor any of its subsidiaries or affiliates shall be liable for any losses, direct, incidental
or consequential damages, or liabilities that may be incurred as a result of network security incidents such as
unauthorized accesses.
<Network Security Recommendations>
Change the password of the camera periodically.
Change the HTTP or HTTPS port number of the camera.
Limit access to the camera by network devices.
LEGAL NOTICE
The user is responsible for compliance with all applicable laws and regulations governing privacy protection and
publicity rights implicated by the use of this product. In some cases, camera and/or audio monitoring or recording
may be restricted or prohibited by the law or regulation, the details of which differ by country and region. Before
installing the product, users should consult the laws and regulations of their country and region, including state and/
or local laws and regulations in such country and region, to ensure that the product is installed in a manner compliant
with all applicable legal requirements. The microphone should not be used if required by local law or regulation. Do
not
install the product in any spaces where occupants or visitors may reasonably have an expectation of privacy,
such as bedrooms, dressing rooms and rest rooms.
Introduction
3
The product should be installed in such a manner that it is clearly visible to all persons whose images and voices are
monitored by the product. In addition, signage prominently displayed in close proximity to the product and clearly
visible to all persons monitored by the product should inform such persons that the product records both their
images and their conversations.
Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable in any way in the event of a dispute between any user and any third
party concerning the installation of the product or camera and/or audio monitoring or recording.
Copyright
Videos, images or sounds recorded with your camera may not be utilized or published without consent of copyright
holders, if any, except in such a way as permitted for personal use under the relevant copyright law.
Use of RM-Lite Software
Flaws or other problems with RM-Lite may result in recording failure or destruction or loss of recorded data. Canon
shall have no liability whatsoever for any loss or damages incurred by the user as a result of such problems.
License Agreement of Software
For the license agreement of the software, please refer to the text file provided along with the installer.
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant
video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or
(2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or
implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer, Windows Server, Microsoft Edge, Surface and ActiveX are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows is legally recognized as the Microsoft Windows Operating System.
This product comes with exFAT, a licensed file system technology from Microsoft.
iPhone, iPad, iPad mini, iPad Air, iPad Pro and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC and microSDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
•ONVIF
®
is a trademark of Onvif, Inc.
All other company or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Open Source Software
The camera contains Open Source Software modules. Confirm each modules license conditions in [Maintenance] >
[General] > [Tool] > [View License] on the Setting Page.
Software under GPL and LGPL
If you would like to obtain the source code under GPL/LGPL, please contact us at nvsossg@canon.co.jp
and provide the
following information in English or Japanese:
1. Product name and firmware version.
2. Name of the software module or modules you would like to obtain.
You can obtain the source code for at least three years from the day you purchased this product. Please note we may bill
you for any costs we incur in providing you the source code.
4
Security Export Control
This product is subject to security export control. Therefore, to export or carry it overseas may require an authorization by
governmental agencies.
5
Types of User Manuals
The following describes the different camera user manuals. When you are instructed to reference another manual, its name
will be listed as shown below.
Notes
1. Any unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
2. The contents of this guide are subject to change without any prior notice.
3. This document has been prepared with the utmost attention to accuracy. If you have any comments, however,
please contact a Canon sales representative.
4. Canon shall assume no liability for any outcome of using this product, notwithstanding items 2 and 3 above.
How to Use This Operation Guide
The assumed reading format of this operation guide is on a computer screen.
Software Screenshots
The software screenshots samples shown in this guide are for illustration only. The screenshots may differ from the
actual screens displayed.
Descriptions use Windows 10 for the operating system, Internet Explorer 11 for the web browser, and the VB-H45 for
sample screens.
The video size set selected for explanations is [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270]. If using a different video size
set, substitute those sizes.
User Manuals
Installation Guide (Included)
This describes precautions and procedures for installing the camera.
Operation Guide (This Guide)
This explains the camera initial settings, camera angle settings, camera viewer operations, settings on the Setting Page,
and troubleshooting, etc.
Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide
This explains details on how to use the Mobile Camera Viewer.
Specifications
This lists the camera specifications.
Camera Management Tool User Manual
This explains details on how to use the Camera Management Tool.
Recorded Video Utility User Manual
This explains details on how to use the Recorded Video Utility.
Network Video Recording Software RM Series Administrator Manual
This explains details on how to use the RM-Lite video recording software (P. 20).
6
Symbols Used in This Guide
Symbols Indicating Camera Models
Explanations that differ depending on the camera model are indicated by the camera name and the following
symbols.
Symbols Indicating Safety Precautions
This section explains the symbols used in this guide. The following symbols used in this guide indicate information for
safe use of the product, as well as important and supplemental information the user should know. Be sure to read and
understand this information when using the product.
Symbol Camera Model
VB-H45, VB-M44
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II
VB-S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II, VB-S805D Mk II
VB-S900F Mk II, VB-S905F Mk II
HM4x
H730
S30
S31
S80x
S90x
Symbol Meaning
Warning
Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in death or serious
injury. Be sure to follow these warnings to ensure safety.
Caution
Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in injury. Be sure to
follow these precautions to ensure safety.
Caution
Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in property damage.
Be sure to follow these precautions.
Important
Cautions and restrictions during operation. Make sure to read these carefully.
Note
Supplementary descriptions and reference information.
7
This section explains precautions that must be followed when using the camera.
If they are not followed, injury, death and/or property damage may occur. Read the following information carefully and be
sure to follow the precautions.
Important Warnings
Safety Precautions
Caution
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The AC adapter (sold separately) can be connected to the camera from a standard AC power outlet.
Please refer to the user manual to make sure that the camera is compatible with the adapter.
The socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible.
Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet before cleaning or maintaining.
FDA regulation
This Network Camera has not been evaluated by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for use as a medical
device. When incorporated into a system with medical applications, FDA regulations may apply. Therefore, please
consult your legal advisor to determine whether FDA regulations apply.
FCC NOTICE
Network Camera, Model Name: VB-H45, VB-M44, VB-H730F Mk II, VB-S30D Mk II, VB-S31D Mk II, VB-S800D Mk II,
VB-S900F Mk II, VB-S805D Mk II, VB-S905F Mk II
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such
changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
HM4x
H730
8
Precautions
Camera Precautions
Precautions for Built-In Camera Functions and Software
Maintenance Precautions
Warning
If you discover defective conditions such as smoke, strange sounds, heat or strange odors, immediately stop using
the camera and contact your nearest dealer.
Fire or electric shock may result from continued use.
Failure to do the following may result in fire or electric shock.
If thunder starts, stop installation or inspection etc. and do not touch the camera or continue connecting the cable.
Do not disassemble or modify the camera.
Do not spray the camera with water, or otherwise make it wet.
Please do not insert objects like water or metal objects within the camera housing.
Do not use flammable sprays near the camera.
Do not leave LAN cables, external power supplies or AC adapter (sold separately) power connectors connected
when the camera is not in use for long periods.
Do not damage the connecting cable.
This camera should not be used with medical devices or other life-support systems.
Depending on the computer and network environment, high-precision video transmission cannot be guaranteed due
to video lag or loss.
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of the camera under the conditions
above.
Caution
Failure to do the following may result in camera malfunction.
Do not capture the sun, halogen lamps, and other very bright light sources or subjects.
Do not expose the camera to strong impact or vibration.
Do not touch the head or lens of the camera.
Do not forcibly turn the rotating parts of the camera by hand.
HM4x
S30
S31
Caution
Do not use the following built-in camera functions or software in situations requiring high reliability:
Intelligent Function
Image Stabilization Function
Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite
These do not guarantee high-precision capture and cannot support applications beyond their intended range of use.
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from the use of these functions or software.
HM4x
Warning
Do not use flammable solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner or benzine when cleaning the camera.
Use of these may result in fire or electric shock.
9
Cleaning the Camera
Turn off the power before cleaning the camera.
Cleaning the Exterior
1 Dampen a soft cloth with water or diluted neutral detergent and gently wipe away any grime.
2 Wipe with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the Lens
Use a commercial lens cleaner to remove grime on the lens surface.
Scratches on the lens surface may result in poor video capture.
Auto focus functionality may be degraded if the lens surface is dusty or dirty.
Camera Disposal
Dispose of the camera in accordance with local laws and regulations.
Be sure to remove the memory card* from the camera before the disposal.
* In this guide, “memory card” refers to the various types of memory cards that can be used with the camera.
Caution
Periodically inspect the parts and screws for rust and loosening.
For inspections, please contact the dealer where you purchased the product.
Failure to follow these precautions could result in injuries and equipment damage due to falling items.
Important
Grime on the top cover, lens protector and dome (when using the separately sold indoor dome housing) may result in focusing
problems and/or reduction of image quality. It is recommended that the cover be cleaned on a regular basis.
HM4x
S30
10
Table of Contents
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 2
Precautions for Use (Disclaimer) ............................................................................................ 2
License Agreement of Software.............................................................................................. 3
Trademarks ............................................................................................................................. 3
Open Source Software............................................................................................................3
Security Export Control ........................................................................................................... 4
User Manuals................................................................................................................... 5
Types of User Manuals ...........................................................................................................5
How to Use This Operation Guide .......................................................................................... 5
Symbols Used in This Guide................................................................................................... 6
Safety Precautions........................................................................................................... 7
Precautions ............................................................................................................................. 8
Cleaning the Camera .............................................................................................................. 9
Camera Disposal .................................................................................................................... 9
Chapter 1 Before Use
Functions of the Network Camera ................................................................................. 18
Camera Software ........................................................................................................... 19
Camera Operations and Settings ......................................................................................... 19
Software to Install on the Computer...................................................................................... 19
Additional Software/Licenses (Sold Separately)................................................................... 20
Operating Environment.................................................................................................. 22
PC Environment Details ........................................................................................................ 22
Verified Mobile Devices (Setting Page, Camera Viewer, Mobile Camera Viewer)
– As of May 2017.............................................................................................................. 23
Steps for Setting Up the Camera................................................................................... 24
Step 1 Preparing to Install the camera ................................................................................. 24
Step 2 Installing the Camera................................................................................................. 24
Step 3 Setting the Camera Angle ......................................................................................... 24
Step 4 Using the Camera Viewers ........................................................................................ 24
Step 5 Adjusting Advanced Settings According to Its Use .................................................. 24
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 25
Chapter 2 Camera Setup
Installing Software ......................................................................................................... 28
Necessary Software..............................................................................................................28
Software Installation.............................................................................................................. 28
Checking/Configuring Security Settings........................................................................ 31
Checking Firewall Settings.................................................................................................... 31
Settings When Using Windows Server.................................................................................. 32
Configuring Initial Camera Settings............................................................................... 35
Flow of Configuration Using the Camera Management Tool ................................................ 35
Setting up the network without a DHCP server..................................................................... 35
11
Chapter 3 Setting the Camera Angle
Flow for the Setting of the Camera Angle...................................................................... 38
Step 1 Configuring the Camera ............................................................................................ 38
Step 2 Setting Zoom .............................................................................................................38
Step 3 Setting the Focus....................................................................................................... 38
Chapter 4 Camera Viewer
Viewing Video with the Camera Viewer ......................................................................... 40
Launching the Camera Viewer.............................................................................................. 40
Switching to the Administrator or an Authorized User .......................................................... 42
Camera Viewer Screen ......................................................................................................... 45
Checking Information............................................................................................................50
Changing the Reception Video Size and Display Screen Size ..................................... 51
Changing the Reception Video Size/Format and Display Screen Size ................................ 51
Displaying in Full Screen Mode ............................................................................................ 52
Operating the Camera................................................................................................... 55
Obtaining Camera Control Privileges ................................................................................... 55
Using Pan/Tilt/Zoom.............................................................................................................. 56
Adjusting Video..................................................................................................................... 61
Using Backlight Compensation ............................................................................................ 62
Using Presets or the Home Position ..................................................................................... 62
Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ........................................................................................... 63
Magnifying and Display Part of Video (Viewer PTZ) ............................................................. 63
Cropping and Displaying Part of an Image (Digital PTZ) ..................................................... 64
Saving Snapshots.......................................................................................................... 67
Recording Video to a Memory Card.............................................................................. 68
Recording Videos Manually .................................................................................................. 68
Confirming Recorded Video ................................................................................................. 69
Receiving/Transmitting Audio........................................................................................ 70
Receiving Audio.................................................................................................................... 70
Transmitting Audio................................................................................................................ 70
Checking the Status of Event Detection ........................................................................ 72
Operating External Device Output........................................................................................ 72
Checking the Status of Event Detection ............................................................................... 72
Chapter 5 Setting Page
How to Use the Setting Page......................................................................................... 76
Accessing the Setting Page.................................................................................................. 76
Common Setting Page Operations ....................................................................................... 77
Operating the Video Display Area ........................................................................................ 78
About Each Setting Page...................................................................................................... 80
[Basic] > [Network]
Configuring Network Settings .................................................................................. 83
LAN ....................................................................................................................................... 83
IPv4 ....................................................................................................................................... 83
IPv6 ....................................................................................................................................... 84
DNS....................................................................................................................................... 85
12
mDNS.................................................................................................................................... 86
[Basic] > [User Management]
Configuring Accounts and Privileges....................................................................... 87
Administrator Account .......................................................................................................... 87
Authorized User Account...................................................................................................... 87
User Authority ....................................................................................................................... 88
[Basic] > [Date and Time]
Setting the Date/Time............................................................................................... 89
Current Date and Time.......................................................................................................... 89
Settings ................................................................................................................................. 89
[Basic] > [Video]
Setting Video Size and Quality................................................................................. 91
All Videos .............................................................................................................................. 91
JPEG ..................................................................................................................................... 92
H.264(1) ................................................................................................................................ 92
H.264(2) ................................................................................................................................ 93
[Basic] > [Viewer]
Configuring the Viewer............................................................................................. 94
General ................................................................................................................................. 94
Viewer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 94
[Camera] > [Camera]
Setting General Camera Controls ............................................................................ 96
Camera Name....................................................................................................................... 96
Camera Control..................................................................................................................... 96
Day/Night (When Auto Is Set) ............................................................................................... 97
Installation Conditions........................................................................................................... 98
Camera Position Control ....................................................................................................... 98
External Input Device............................................................................................................ 98
External Output Device......................................................................................................... 98
[Camera] > [Initial Settings]
Setting Initial Video Settings..................................................................................... 99
Camera Position.................................................................................................................... 99
Camera Settings .................................................................................................................100
[Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus]
Day/Night Mode Focus .......................................................................................... 107
Day/Night Mode Focus ....................................................................................................... 107
Camera Control................................................................................................................... 108
[Camera] > [Panorama]
Creating a Panorama Image .................................................................................. 110
Creating a Panorama Image............................................................................................... 110
Saving the Panorama Image as an Image File/Opening the Image File ............................ 112
Capture Settings ................................................................................................................. 113
[Camera] > [View restriction]
Setting View Restriction.......................................................................................... 114
Configuring View Restrictions ............................................................................................. 115
[Camera] > [Preset]
Registering Presets ................................................................................................ 118
13
Registering a Preset............................................................................................................118
[Camera] > [Preset Tour]
Setting the Preset Tour Route ................................................................................ 121
Screen Composition............................................................................................................ 121
Tour Route Settings.............................................................................................................123
[Video and Audio] > [ADSR]
Reducing Data Size by Lowering Video Quality in Specific Areas ........................ 126
Specified Area .................................................................................................................... 126
ADSR................................................................................................................................... 127
[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]
Displaying Date, Time and Text on the Video........................................................ 129
Date display ........................................................................................................................ 129
Time display........................................................................................................................ 129
Text display......................................................................................................................... 130
Common Settings................................................................................................................ 130
[Video and Audio] > [Privacy Mask]
Setting Privacy Mask.............................................................................................. 131
Registering Privacy Masks.................................................................................................. 131
Changing/Deleting a Privacy Mask..................................................................................... 133
[Video and Audio] > [Audio]
Setting Audio Input/Output..................................................................................... 135
General Audio ..................................................................................................................... 135
Audio Server ....................................................................................................................... 136
Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3.................................................................................................... 137
[Server] > [Server]
HTTP, SNMP and FTP Server Settings................................................................... 138
HTTP Server........................................................................................................................ 138
SNMP Server....................................................................................................................... 138
SNMP v1 and v2c Server .................................................................................................... 139
SNMP v3 Server ..................................................................................................................139
FTP Server........................................................................................................................... 139
WS-Security......................................................................................................................... 140
[Server] > [Video Server]
Video Transmission Settings .................................................................................. 141
Video Server........................................................................................................................ 141
[Server] > [RTP Server]
RTP Settings........................................................................................................... 142
RTP Server .......................................................................................................................... 142
Audio Multicast ................................................................................................................... 142
RTP Stream 1 to 5 ...............................................................................................................143
[Video Record] > [Upload]
HTTP and FTP Upload Settings ............................................................................. 144
Video Record Settings ........................................................................................................ 144
General Upload................................................................................................................... 144
HTTP Upload....................................................................................................................... 145
FTP Upload ......................................................................................................................... 146
14
[Video Record] > [E-mail Notification]
Setting E-mail Notification ...................................................................................... 148
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................... 148
[Event] > [External Device]
External Device Input Triggered Operation Settings ............................................. 149
External Device Output....................................................................................................... 149
External Device Input.......................................................................................................... 150
External Device Input 1, 2 .................................................................................................. 150
[Event] > [Audio Detection]
Abnormal Audio Input Triggered Operation Settings ............................................ 152
Volume Detection................................................................................................................152
Scream Detection ............................................................................................................... 153
[Event] > [Timer]
Timer Triggered Operation Settings....................................................................... 155
Timer 1 to 4 ......................................................................................................................... 155
[Event] > [Intelligent Function]
- Overview -............................................................................................................ 157
Intelligent Function.............................................................................................................. 157
Notes on Intelligent Function Settings and Operations ...................................................... 160
Registering Presets.............................................................................................................160
[Event] > [Intelligent Function]
- Video Detection - ................................................................................................ 161
Steps for Configuring Video Detection ............................................................................... 161
Configuring Detection Criteria ([Detection Conditions] Tab).............................................. 165
Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)......................................................... 175
Checking Event Status........................................................................................................ 175
Displaying Settings for Detection Areas/Detection Lines, Non-Detection Area and
Detection Results (Display Options) .............................................................................. 176
Reducing Effects of Lighting Change (Detections Settings) .............................................. 176
Context Menu...................................................................................................................... 177
[Event] > [Intelligent Function]
- Shared Operations -............................................................................................. 178
Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)......................................................... 178
Restarting Intelligent Function ............................................................................................ 179
[Event] > [Switch Day/Night]
Executing Presets When Switching Day/Night Mode ............................................ 180
Day/Night Mode Switching ................................................................................................. 180
[Event] > [Linked Event]
Using Event Combinations..................................................................................... 181
Linked Event 1 to 4 .............................................................................................................181
Linked Event Operation Examples...................................................................................... 183
[Security] > [Host Access Restrictions]
Setting Access Restrictions ................................................................................... 185
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions ............................................................................................ 185
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions ............................................................................................ 186
15
[Security] > [SSL/TLS]
Setting HTTP Communication Encryption .............................................................. 187
Certificates.......................................................................................................................... 187
Certificate Management...................................................................................................... 188
Encrypted Communications................................................................................................ 188
[Security] > [802.1X]
Network Port Authentication Settings..................................................................... 190
802.1X Authentication ......................................................................................................... 190
Authentication Method ........................................................................................................ 190
Certificate Information.........................................................................................................190
Certificate Management...................................................................................................... 191
[Security] > [IPsec]
Setting IPsec .......................................................................................................... 192
IPsec ................................................................................................................................... 192
Auto Key Exchange Settings .............................................................................................. 193
IPsec Set 1 to 5 ................................................................................................................... 193
[Memory Card]
Memory Card Operations and Information Display ............................................... 196
Video Record Settings ........................................................................................................ 196
Memory Card Operations ................................................................................................... 196
Memory Card Information ................................................................................................... 198
[Maintenance] > [General]
Displaying Camera Device Information and Perform Maintenance....................... 199
Device Information..............................................................................................................199
Tool ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 199
[Maintenance] > [Backup / Restore]
Saving/Restoring Camera Settings ........................................................................ 201
Backup / Restore ................................................................................................................201
[Maintenance] > [Update Firmware]
Updating the Camera Firmware............................................................................. 202
Device Information..............................................................................................................202
Update Firmware ................................................................................................................ 202
[Maintenance] > [Log]
Checking/Sending Camera Log Information.......................................................... 203
View Logs............................................................................................................................ 203
Log Notifications ................................................................................................................. 203
Chapter 6 Appendix
Modifiers ...................................................................................................................... 206
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 208
List of Log Messages .................................................................................................. 211
Log Messages on the Camera............................................................................................ 211
Error Log ............................................................................................................................. 211
Warning log......................................................................................................................... 215
Notification log .................................................................................................................... 219
16
List of Viewer Messages.............................................................................................. 223
Messages Shown in the Information Display...................................................................... 223
Restoring Factory Default Settings .............................................................................. 225
Restoring the Initial Settings from a Web Browser.............................................................. 225
Restoring Factory Default Settings with the Reset Switch on the Camera ......................... 225
List of Factory Default Settings.................................................................................... 227
Index............................................................................................................................ 238
Chapter
Before Use
This chapter explains the camera functions, software and operating environment.
It also describes the flow from preparation and setup through to actual use.
18
A network camera not only enables you to operate the camera, but also allows you to record and upload the video, and
perform monitoring using the various intelligent functions of the camera.
However, the functions that can be used differ depending on the model. For the difference in functions by model, please
refer to the table below.
Table of Function Compatibility by Model
The functions for which availability differs depending on the model are shown below.
Functions of the Network Camera
Uploading
video
Recording to
memory card
Operation and setup by
administrator
Operation by guest users
Monitoring by
intelligent functions
Inputting/outputting
audio
Using external devices
Monitoring by guards, etc.
Pan/Tilt/Zoom - ---
Pan/Tilt --- --
Audio Output Terminals  ----
External Device Input Terminals 2 2 1 1 1 1
External Device Output Terminals 2 2 1 1 1 1
Rotate Video Display - --
Focus  ---
Aperture  ----
Enhanced Digital Zoom -----
Image Stabilizer -----
Day/Night Mode Focus  ----
Panorama Creation -  --
View Restriction Setting -  --
Maximum Number of Registered Presets 65 21 65 65 21 21
Preset Tour  --
Event Triggered Preset Movement -  --
microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC Memory Cards Supported - - 
SD/SDHC/SDXC Memory Cards Supported  ----
Full resolution 1920 x 1080
VB-H45, VB-H730F Mk II, VB-S30D Mk II,
VB-S31D Mk II, VB-S800D Mk II, VB-S900F Mk II
Full resolution 1280 x 960 VB-M44, VB-S805D Mk II, VB-S905F Mk II
HM4x
H730
S30
S31
S80x
S90x
Before Use
1
19
The following software is available for efficiently configuring and operating the camera.
Camera Operations and Settings
Camera operations are performed using the Camera Viewer/Mobile Camera Viewer.
Camera settings are specified from the Setting Page.
Camera Viewer (P. 39) /Mobile Camera Viewer
Controls the camera, and monitors video and various events.
You can use the Camera Viewer (mainly for computers) and the Mobile Camera Viewer (mainly for devices with a
screen size of 7 inches or less).
The functions available in the Viewer differ according to the user authority (P. 43).
Note
For details on using Mobile Camera Viewer, please refer to “Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide”.
Setting Page (P. 75)
The Setting Page is for the administrator to configure and manage the camera.
Software to Install on the Computer
The following software can be installed on the computer to be used.
Note
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (when using Internet Explorer 9) or .NET Framework 4.5 (when using Internet Explorer 10/11) is necessary to use
Camera Management Tool and Recorded Video Utility.
If it is not installed on the computer, it will be automatically installed when using the installer (P. 28).
Camera Management Tool
This tool is used for batch managing multiple cameras, from initial settings to performing maintenance. The Camera
Management Tool can perform the following tasks.
Detecting cameras
Set various camera settings.
Display the Viewer and the Setting Page.
Update firmware, back up/restore settings, perform memory card and other operations, as well as camera
maintenance.
For details on uses and functions, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
The Camera Management Tool can be installed from the installer.
Installer name: VBToolsInstall.exe
Recorded Video Utility
This utility is used for viewing and managing the videos recorded on the memory card mounted in the camera. The
Recorded Video Utility enables you to perform the following operations on recorded videos.
Displaying a list of videos
Camera Software
20
Playing and deleting videos
Downloading videos to a computer
For details on using the utility and its functions, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.
The Recorded Video Utility can be installed from the installer.
Installer name: VBToolsInstall.exe
RM-Lite
This software displays, records and plays back video from up to four cameras via a network.
Installer name: RMLiteInstall.exe
RM-Lite Software
Note
For details on the usage, operating environment, and functions of RM-Lite, please refer to “Administrator Manual”.
RM supports German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Russian, Thai, Turkish, Chinese (simplified), and Japanese.
Additional Software/Licenses (Sold Separately)
You can purchase additional software and licenses as necessary.
Canon H.264 Additional User License AUL-VB
Additional license for viewing H.264 video with multiple computers via the Viewer or Recorded Video Utility.
Each camera includes one license. Additional licenses are necessary for multiple computers to view H.264 video
from a single camera.
Type Overview
RM-Lite Storage Server Up to four cameras can be registered to record video (JPEG).
RM-Lite Viewer
Plays video recorded in the storage server and displays live video (JPEG/H.264) from
the camera.
Up to four cameras can be registered for the viewer.
RM-Lite Manager Use to register cameras and configure recording schedules.
RM-Lite Viewer RM-Lite Storage Server
Network
Flow of video from the camera
Flow of recorded video
Important
To add the RM-Lite Viewer or RM-Lite Manager, you must purchase RM-Lite-V (sold separately).
Before Use
1
21
RM-64/RM-25/RM-9
This software allows network cameras to be used for multipoint surveillance, and for displaying, recording and
playing back videos from the camera.
The number of cameras that can be registered with RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 varies: 64, 25, or 9 cameras respectively can
be registered. By using multiple Storage Servers, you can construct a surveillance system supporting up to 512
cameras.
Note
Licenses for upgrading from RM-9 to RM-25 or RM-64, and from RM-25 to RM-64 are also available.
RM-V
This additional license lets you install the RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 RM Manager and RM Viewer on multiple computers.
Purchase the license to be able to view video from the camera from multiple locations and for other similar purposes.
RM-Lite-V
This additional license lets you install the RM-Lite Viewer or RM-Lite Manager on multiple computers.
Purchase the license to be able to view video from the camera from multiple locations and for other similar purposes.
22
For the latest information on this product (firmware and software, user manual, operating environment, etc.), please refer to
the Canon website.
PC Environment Details
*1 Cannot be started from the Windows start screen
*2 Does not support playback of Video (H.264) or audio transmission/reception
Note
For information on the operating environment of the Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User
Manual”.
For information on the operating environment of the Recorded Video Utility, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.
Operating Environment
CPU
(Recommended)
Intel Core i7-2600 or higher
Graphics Board
(Recommended)
Not specified
Memory
(Recommended)
2 GB or higher
Viewer Display
(Recommended)
1920 x 1080 or higher
OS and
Compatible Web
Browser
Windows 7 Ultimate/Professional/Enterprise/Home
Premium SP1 32/64-bit
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit, Chrome 58*
2
Windows 8.1/Windows 8.1 Pro/Windows 8.1
Enterprise 32/64-bit*
1
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit, Chrome 58*
2
Windows 10 Pro/Windows 10 Enterprise/Windows 10
Education/Windows 10 Home 32/64-bit
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit, Microsoft
Edge*
2
, Chrome 58*
2
Windows Server 2008 Standard SP2 32/64-bit Internet Explorer 9 32-bit
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard SP1 64-bit Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit, Chrome 58*
2
Windows Server 2012 Standard 64-bit*
1
Internet Explorer 10 32/64-bit, Chrome 58*
2
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit*
1
Internet Explorer 11 32/64-bit, Chrome 58*
2
Windows Server 2016 Standard 64-bit Internet Explorer 11 64-bit, Chrome 58*
2
Must be configured to allow use of JavaScript, IFRAME (html tag), and web storage
For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled
Operating System
Language
Setting Page, Camera Viewer, Mobile Camera Viewer:
German/English/Spanish/French/Italian/Polish/Russian/Turkish/Thai/Korean/Chinese (Simplified) /
Japanese
Before Use
1
23
Verified Mobile Devices (Setting Page, Camera Viewer, Mobile Camera
Viewer)
– As of May 2017
*1 Does not support playback of Video (H.264) or audio transmission/reception
*2 Setting Page and Camera Viewer is not supported
Mobile Devices OS Compatible Web Browser
Surface 3
Windows 10 Home 64-bit
Internet Explorer 11,
Microsoft Edge*
1
Must be configured to allow use of JavaScript, and web storage
For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled
iPad mini 4
iPad Air 2
iPad Pro
iPhone SE*
2
iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus*
2
iOS 9.3.5
iOS 10.3.2
Safari*
1
Must be configured to allow use of JavaScript, IFRAME (html tag), and web storage
For Camera Viewer only, cookies must be enabled
Nexus 9 Android 7.1.1 Chrome 58*
1
Galaxy Tab S 8.4 Android 4.4.2 Chrome 58*
1
Galaxy Tab S 10.5 Android 4.4.2 Chrome 58*
1
Nexus 6P*
2
Android 7.1.2 Chrome 58*
1
Galaxy S7 edge*
2
Android 7.0.0 Chrome 58*
1
24
Step 1 Preparing to Install the camera
Make preparations to use the camera via a network.
Install the necessary software
“Installing Software” (P. 28)
Check/configure the computer and web browser security settings
“Checking/Configuring Security Settings” (P. 31)
Use the Camera Management Tool to configure initial camera settings.
“Configuring Initial Camera Settings” (P. 35)
Step 2 Installing the Camera
Install the camera to suit the environment it will be used in.
“Installation Guide”
Step 3 Setting the Camera Angle
Use the Setting Page to set the camera angle while checking video on the computer screen.
“Setting the Camera Angle” (P. 37)
Step 4 Using the Camera Viewers
Operate the camera while viewing the video in the Viewer.
“Camera Viewer” (P. 39)
Step 5 Adjusting Advanced Settings According to Its Use
Advanced settings can be made in the Settings Menu, such as
for camera control and security, according to how the camera
will be used.
Settings can also be made using the Camera Management Tool.
For details, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User
Manual”.
“Setting Page” (P. 75)
Steps for Setting Up the Camera
H730
S80x
S90x
Camera Viewer
Setting Page
Before Use
1
25
Troubleshooting
Please refer to “Appendix” (P. 205), in case of error messages or problems.
26
Chapter
Camera Setup
To prepare the camera for use, install the necessary software on the computer, and configuring the initial
settings for web browser security and the camera.
28
Install the necessary software.
Necessary Software
You will need the following software:
Camera Management Tool
Recorded Video Utility
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5 (unnecessary if already installed on computer)
Note
If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5 is not installed on the computer, the installer will automatically install the version
appropriate for the version of Internet Explorer used on the computer.
Software Installation
Installation Methods
The software can be installed together using [Easy Installation], or you can select which software to install using
[Custom Installation].
Installing Software
The installation screen is displayed.
Note
If the [User Account Control] screen is displayed, click [Yes] or [Continue].
Installing Software
1
Confirm that all other applications have been closed.
2
Double-click [VBToolsInstall.exe].
Camera Setup
2
29
If you select [Easy Installation], confirm the software that will be installed and click [Next].
If you select [Custom Installation], select the software to be installed and click [Next].
The User License Agreement screen is displayed.
3
Select the installation method.
4
Confirm or select the software that will be installed.
30
Installation starts.
The Camera Management Tool icon and Recorded Video Utility icon will be displayed on the desktop.
5
Read through the user license agreement and click [Yes] if you accept it.
6
Click [Exit] or [Reboot].
Camera Setup
2
31
Camera configuration and operation may be blocked, depending on the security functions of the operating system and web
browser.
Change or check security settings beforehand.
Checking Firewall Settings
To use the software on computers where Windows Firewall is enabled, you may need to add each software as an
application allowed to communicate via the firewall.
Note
Even if you do not perform the following steps, you can still add each software with the [Windows Security Alert] dialog box that is
displayed when you launch the software.
Checking/Configuring Security Settings
1
Click [System and Security] > [Windows Firewall] in [Control Panel].
2
Click [Allow an app or feature through Windows Firewall].
32
Settings When Using Windows Server
Adding the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site
When the security level for internet sites and intranet sites is set to [High], it is necessary to add the IP address of the
camera to the list of trusted sites.
Note
Set the camera IP address with the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User
Manual”.
3
Click [Change settings] > [Allow another app].
4
Select the software to use, such as [Camera Management Tool], and click [Add].
1
Click [Network and Internet] > [Internet Options] in [Control Panel].
Camera Setup
2
33
The [Trusted sites] dialog box is displayed.
Note
Clear the [Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone] checkbox if it is selected.
The camera’s IP address will be added to the [Websites] list.
You can add IP addresses for multiple cameras by using a wildcard (*) when entering the IP address.
For example, if you enter “192.160.1.*”, all cameras that share the “192.160.1” portion of the address will be added as trusted
sites.
Sound Settings for Using the Audio Functions
In Windows Server, the sound function is disabled by default.
To use audio functions with the viewer, follow the steps below to enable the sound function.
2
Click the [Security] tab.
3
Click [Trusted sites] > [Sites].
4
Enter the IP address of the camera under [Add this website to the zone], then click [Add].
34
The [Audio Service Not Running] dialog box is displayed.
The [Sound] dialog box is displayed.
If no audio device is installed, refer to your computer manual.
1
Open [Control Panel] and click [Hardware].
2
Click [Sound].
3
Click [Yes].
4
Click the [Playback] tab to confirm that an audio device has been installed.
Camera Setup
2
35
To use a camera, it is necessary to first set the administrator account for the camera, then configure the network settings,
and then connect the camera and computer via the network. Use the Camera Management Tool to configure these settings.
The Camera Management Tool also enables multiple cameras to be configured at the same time.
For information on how to use the Camera Management Tool, please refer to the “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
Flow of Configuration Using the Camera Management Tool
Launching the Camera Management Tool
Searching for Cameras
Search for cameras connected to the same network as the computer in which the Camera Management Tool is installed.
Registering the Administrator Account (Administrator Name and Administrator Password)
Configuring Initial Camera Settings
Configure the basic settings of the camera, such as the network settings and camera name.
Setting up the network without a DHCP server
Cameras with the factory default settings are configured to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server. Detect the camera
using the Camera Management Tool with a DHCP environment or an IPv6 environment.
However, you can access a camera connected to a network environment without a response from the DHCP server by
entering a specific IP address (192.168.100.1) in a web browser.
The [Default Settings] top page will be displayed.
After the camera reboots, the Setting Page is displayed and you can configure the settings.
Configuring Initial Camera Settings
Important
You can only access a camera 30 seconds after connecting the camera to the network environment without a response from the DHCP
server using the 192.168.100.1 IP address.
If there is a response from the DHCP server after 30 seconds has elapsed, the camera switches to the address assigned by the DHCP
server.
When accessing a camera by entering 192.168.100.1 in a web browser, set the computer to an IP address with the same subnet
(255.255.255.0).
If multiple cameras with the factory default settings exist on the same network, the cameras cannot be accessed.
1
Launch the web browser.
2
Enter 192.168.100.1, and press the Enter key.
3
Enter the administrator name and administrator password, and click [Apply].
36
Chapter
Setting the Camera Angle
After installing the camera, set the camera angle while checking the video displayed on the Setting Page.
H730
S80x
S90x
38
Adjust the camera angle when installing the camera or after changing the installation location.
The camera angle settings are configured by accessing the Setting Page (P. 76).
Step 1 Configuring the Camera
Set the digital zoom and video flip, which affect the camera angle.
[Digital Zoom] (P. 96) in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] on the Setting Page.
[Video Flip] (P. 98) in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Installation Conditions] on the Setting Page.
Step 2 Setting Zoom
Set the zoom position with the zoom slider.
[Camera] > [Initial Settings] (P. 99) on the Setting Page.
If you set [Digital Zoom] to [Enable] in [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] on the Setting Page in Step 1, the digital
zoom area (yellow) is displayed and digital zoom becomes available.
The higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality becomes.
Step 3 Setting the Focus
You can manually focus on the subject, or fix the focus at infinity. When manually operating the focus, you can use the One-
shot AF feature to focus on the subject.
[Camera] > [Initial Settings] > [Camera Settings] > [Focus] (P. 101) on the Setting Page.
Note
For precautions, etc. regarding the focus, please refer to the “Important” and “Note” sections of [Camera] > [Initial Settings] > [Camera
Settings] > [Focus] on the Setting Page (P. 101).
Flow for the Setting of the Camera Angle
Important
If you change the zoom after configuring the intelligent function, privacy mask, preset, and ADSR, those settings must be configured
again.
H730
H730
Digital Zoom Range
H730
Chapter
Camera Viewer
Use the web browser to access the Viewer in the camera to perform camera operations, view live video, and
check the status of events.
40
You can start the Camera Viewer to switch users and check/configure the status of the camera as well as the video display.
Note
If you open another window or tab to access the camera while an authenticated web page is displayed, the authentication information of
the displayed web page may be discarded.
In this case, enter the authentication information again.
Launching the Camera Viewer
You can enter the IP address set with the Camera Management Tool directly into a web browser to display the Setting Page
of the camera, and start the Viewer from the Setting Page.
Note
For details on settings in the Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
The authentication screen for Setting Page will be displayed.
The Settings Menu is displayed.
Note
You can set [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] to [Display Viewer] in the setting menu to set the Viewer as the default
page (P. 94).
Viewing Video with the Camera Viewer
1
Launch the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address, and press the Enter key.
3
Enter the Administrator Name and Administrator Password and click [OK].
4
Click [Viewer].
Camera Viewer
4
41
The authentication screen for the Viewer is displayed.
The Camera Viewer is displayed.
User Authentication
When you use the Viewer and the Setting page, an authentication screen is displayed, and you are prompted to enter
a user name and password.
If you enter the wrong user name or password, you will not be able to connect to the camera. Enter the correct user
name and password and connect to the camera.
When [Basic] > [Viewer] > [Viewer Settings] > [User Authentication] on the Setting Page is set to [Do not
authenticate], the authentication screen is not displayed when connecting the Viewer.
5
Enter the administrator name and administrator password, and click [OK].
42
The administrator name and administrator password are set using the Camera Management Tool.
Note
Only administrators can connect to a camera using the Setting Page.
When IE ESC (Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration) is enabled in Windows Server, the blocked content dialog box
may be displayed when attempting to access the Setting P5age or the viewer. If this happens, please register the camera IP
address as a trusted site (P. 32).
Switching to the Administrator or an Authorized User
If [Basic] > [Viewer] > [Viewer Settings] > [User Authentication] is set to [Do not authenticate] on the Setting Page, an
authentication screen is not displayed when connecting to the Viewer, and you can use the Viewer as a guest user. Guest
users cannot perform some operations with the Viewer, but you can also switch the user in order to use the Viewer as an
administrator or authorized user.
Important
Change the administrator password periodically to enhance system security. Do not forget the new password.
Restore factory default settings if you have forgotten the administrator account (P. 225). However, you will become unable to
connect to the camera because the administrator account is also initialized. Use the Camera Management Tool to configure the
initial settings.
It is strongly recommended that you clear the [Remember my credentials] checkbox when an authorized user shares a Viewer
on the same computer.
Authentication screen for the Setting Page Authentication screen for the Viewer
1
Click the [Main] button.
Camera Viewer
4
43
The [Main] menu will be displayed.
The user authentication window is displayed.
The Viewer for the user entered for user authentication is displayed.
Camera Viewer Access Restrictions
You can set authorized users, which require user authentication, and guest users, which do not require
authentication.
The functions that each user can use in the Camera Viewer depend on the privileges assigned to the user (P. 88).
2
Click [Switch Users].
3
Enter a user name and password and click [OK].
44
Administrator:
The user assigned all privileges.
Access the Viewer using the administrator name and password registered for the administrator account.
The administrator can disable all the privileges of an authorized user or a guest user, and completely prohibit
authorized users and guest users from accessing the camera.
Authorized user:
An authorized user has higher privileges than a guest user.
It is necessary to register the user name and password (P. 87).
Guest user:
This user can only use a limited set of functions.
Can access the Viewer without performing user authentication.
The four types of privileges for using the Viewers are privileged camera control, camera control, video distribution
and audio distribution.
The scope of each privilege and whether it can be granted to a user is shown below.
If an item in [Privileged Camera Control], [Camera Control], or [Video Distribution] is set to [Enable] in the above
table, the items above and to the right of that item are also set to [Enable]. If an item is set to [Disable], the items
below and to the left of that item are also set to [Disable].
In the rows, more powerful privileges are on the left and less powerful privileges are on the right. However, audio
distribution can be set separately.
In the columns, authorized users have higher privileges than guest users.
Note
With the factory default settings, authorized users are assigned privileges for camera control.
With the factory default settings, guest users are assigned privileges for camera control, video distribution, and audio distribution.
Privilege
Privileged Camera
Control
Camera Control Video Distribution Audio Distribution
Scope of Privilege
Can perform the most
operations after the
administrator.
Can perform some
Viewer operations.
View video with the
Viewer
Receive audio with
the Viewer
Grant to Authorized
Users
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Grant to Guest Users No Yes Yes Yes
Important
Multiple computers cannot connect to a single camera at the same time using the same administrator account.
An authorized user or a guest user can connect to the camera from multiple computers at the same time. However, when
controlling the camera, the control privileges are given to the authorized user who accessed the camera most recently. On the
other hand, guest users are placed in a queue.
[Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] must be set to [Display Viewer] to enable authorized users and guest users to
connect to the camera.
Camera Viewer
4
45
Camera Viewer Screen
The privileges required for operating the Viewer are indicated with the following symbols.
Administrator Privileges
Privileged Camera Control or higher privileges
Camera Control or higher privileges
No Symbol Video Distribution or higher privileges
Audio Distribution privileges
(R)
(S)
(T)
(U)
(V)
(Q)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(7)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(24)
(25)
(14)
(12)
(13)
(15)
(1)
(22)
(23)
(16)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(K)
(L)
(M)
(N)
(17) (20)(18) (19)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(O)
(P)
46
(1) Video Display Area
Displays video received from the camera.
(2) [Reconnect] Button
Reconnects to the camera. Can be operated when the Viewer is not connected to the camera.
(3) [Full Screen Mode] Button
Video is displayed in full screen mode (P. 52).
(4) [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] Button
Switch between Area Zoom and Drag to Move functions for dragging in the video display area (P. 58).
(5) [BLC] (Back Light Compensation) Button
Turns on/off backlight compensation. This control is effective when the video is dark due to backlight (P. 62).
(6) [Memory Card Recording] Button
Start and stop video recording to a memory card (P. 68).
(7) [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button
Obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 55).
(8) [Snapshot] Button
Open the snapshot panel and display a still image of the moment you clicked the button in the control display
area (P. 67).
(9) [Viewer PTZ] Button
Starts/stops the Viewer PTZ. When started, the Viewer PTZ panel is shown in the control display area (P. 63).
(10) [Digital PTZ] Button
Starts/stops the Digital PTZ. When started, the Digital PTZ panel is shown in the control display area (P. 64).
(11) [Panorama Display] Button
Displays the panorama display panel in the control display area (P. 60).
(12) [Close] Button
Closes the panels shown in the control display area.
(13) Snapshot Tab
Click this to switch the control display area to the snapshot panel (P. 67).
(14) Viewer PTZ/Digital PTZ Tab
Click this to switch the control display area to the Viewer PTZ/Digital PTZ panel (P. 63).
(15) Panorama Display Tab
Click this to switch the control display area to the panorama display panel (P. 60).
(16) Control Display Area
Click (13), (14), or (15) to display the snapshot panel, Viewer PTZ/Digital PTZ panel, or panorama display panel.
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
Camera Viewer
4
47
(17) [Main] Menu
Switches the language or user, and switches the Setting Page or Mobile Camera Viewer.
(A) [Language] Button
Switches the display language.
(B) [Switch Users]
Use this to log in as an administrator or authorized user (P. 42).
(C) [Settings Page]
The screen switches to the Setting Page (P. 76).
(D) [Mobile Camera Viewer]
Switches the connection to the Mobile Camera Viewer. For details on Mobile Camera Viewer, please refer
to “Mobile Camera Viewer Operation Guide”.
(18) [Video and Audio] Menu
Configures the video display size and audio transmission/reception of the Viewer.
(E) Video Size
Select the video reception size and video format from the camera (P. 51).
(F) H.264 Reception
Selects whether to enable or disable H.264 video reception (P. 51).
For guest users, [H.264] is displayed if [Enable] is set in [Basic] > [Viewer] > [Viewer Settings] > [H.264 for
Guest Users] on the Setting Page (P. 95).
(G) Display Size
Select the video display size for the screen (P. 51).
(H) Maximum Frame Rate
Select the maximum frame rate for JPEG video (P. 52).
(I) Audio Reception
Start/stop audio reception from the camera and set the volume (P. 70).
(J) Audio Transmission
Start/stop audio transmission from the camera, and set the volume and transmission time (P. 70).
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
48
(19) [Camera Operation] Menu
Sets the pan/tilt/zoom, focus, exposure, and day/night switch of the camera.
(K) Pan/Tilt
Operate a button to move the angle in the direction of the arrow (P. 60).
(L) Pan/Tilt Speed
Select the operating speed for the pan/tilt buttons (P. 60).
(M) Zoom
Operate a button to zoom in and zoom out (P. 60).
(N) Zoom Speed
Select the operation speed for the zoom button (P. 60).
(O) Focus
Sets the camera to focus on the subject (P. 61).
(P) Exposure Compensation
Corrects the exposure according to the brightness of the subject (P. 61).
(Q) Day/Night
Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment (P. 61).
(K)
(L)
(M)
(N)
(O)
(P)
(Q)
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730 S30
Camera Viewer
4
49
(20) [Event and Input/Output] Menu
Enables you to check the output operations and input status of an external device, the detection status of the
intelligent function and the status of linked events.
(R) External Device Output
Use external device output (P. 72).
(S) External Device Input
Displays the status of the external device input signal for each input source (P. 72).
(T) Intelligent Function (Video Detection)
Displays the status of video detection by the intelligent function for each detection setting number (P. 73).
(U) Intelligent Function (Audio Detection)
Displays the status of [Volume Detection] or [Scream Detection] (P. 73).
(V) Linked Events
Displays the status of linked events (P. 73).
(21) Information Display
Information, warning and error messages are displayed (P. 50).
(22) Pan/Tilt Slider
Drag the sliders to pan (horizontally) or tilt (vertically) the camera (P. 56).
(23) Zoom Slider
Turn the knob to operate the zoom in (telephoto)/zoom out (wide-angle) function of the camera (P. 56).
(24) Preset Selection Menu
Selects a preset registered in the camera in advance (P. 62).
(25) [Home Position] Button
Move the camera angle to the home position (P. 62).
(R)
(S)
(T)
(U)
(V)
50
Checking Information
Information, such as the frame rate, camera pan/tilt/zoom values and descriptions of each function, is shown in the
Information Display.
Warning and error messages will also be displayed here if there are problems with camera operations or systems.
For details on the information displayed, please refer to “List of Viewer Messages” (P. 223).
Important
When [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) is enabled, the actual angle of view of the video will be
smaller than the zoom values shown in the Information Display.
Information Display
HM4x
Camera Viewer
4
51
You can set the size and format of the video received from the camera and the size of the display screen on the computer.
Changing the Reception Video Size/Format and Display Screen Size
Open the [Video and Audio] menu and configure the video received from the camera.
(1) Video Size Setting
Select the size and format of video received from the camera.
The sizes that can be selected depend on the setting in [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] on the
Setting Page (P. 91).
*1 If you enable [H.264] (make it purple), the H.264 video size is added to the menu.
*2 For VB-M44, VB-S805D Mk II and VB-S905F Mk II, [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] cannot be set for [Video
Size Set] (P. 91).
(2) H.264
Enable this (make it purple) to receive the H.264 video.
If you click this when it is disabled (gray), the [CANON SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT] dialog box is displayed.
Click [Yes] to accept the terms of the license agreement. The decoder is downloaded from the camera, enabling
H.264 video reception. The [CANON SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT] dialog box is not displayed for a guest user.
(3) Display Size Setting
The sizes that can be configured depend on the setting in [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] on the
Setting Page (P. 91).
Changing the Reception Video Size and Display Screen
Size
[Video Size Set] Setting
Selectable Video Size
JPEG H.264*
1
1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270*
2
480 x 270
960 x 540
1920 x 1080
The sizes set with [Video Size] in [Basic] > [Video] >
[H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] on the Setting Page (P. 92),
determine the sizes displayed in the menu.
When [H.264(2)] is set to [Enable] in [Basic] > [Video] >
[H.264(2)] on the Setting Page (P. 93), both the [H.264(1)]
and [H.264(2)] video sizes are displayed in the menu.
1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180
320 x 180
640 x 360
1280 x 720
1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240
320 x 240
640 x 480
1280 x 960
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
52
* For VB-M44, VB-S805D Mk II and VB-S905F Mk II, [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] cannot be set for [Video Size
Set] (P. 91).
(4) Max. Frame Rate (JPEG)
You can select the maximum frame rate for JPEG video.
The setting is not selectable when displaying H.264 video in the video display area.
Displaying in Full Screen Mode
You can display the video display area in full screen mode by clicking the [Full Screen Mode] button in the upper right of
the Viewer.
Menus
When the full screen view is used, the menu panels required for controlling the camera are displayed on the bottom
of the screen, as with the Camera Viewer screen.
The privileges required for operating the menu panel are indicated with the following symbols.
[Video Size Set] Setting Selectable Screen Size Remarks
1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270*
Actual Pixels
480 x 270
960 x 540
1920 x 1080
Fit to Window
[Actual Pixels] displays the video at
the size at which it is being captured.
[Fit to Window] displays the video at
the maximum size possible in the web
browser window.
1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180
Actual Pixels
480 x 270
640 x 360
1280 x 720
Fit to Window
1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240
Actual Pixels
480 x 360
640 x 480
1280 x 960
Fit to Window
Administrator Privileges
Privileged Camera Control or higher privileges
Camera Control or higher privileges
No Symbol Video Distribution or higher privileges
Audio Distribution privileges
Camera Viewer
4
53
(1) Menu Area Display Switch Button
Switches between displaying and hiding the menu bar.
(2) [Reconnect] Button
Reconnects to the camera. Can be operated when the Viewer is not connected to the camera.
(3) Full Screen Mode Switch Button
Returns the video display area to the regular view.
(4) [Video and Audio] Menu
Configures the video display size and audio transmission/reception of the Viewer.
(A) Video Size
Sets the reception video size from the camera (P. 51).
(B) H.264
Selects whether to enable/disable H.264 video reception (P. 51).
(C) Maximum Frame Rate
Selects the maximum frame rate for JPEG video (P. 51).
(D) Audio Reception
Plays/stops the received audio and sets the volume (P. 70).
(E) Audio Transmission
Plays/stops the transmitted audio and sets the volume and audio transmission time (P. 70).
(5) Camera Operation Menu
Performs the basic settings and operations of the camera.
(F) Preset
Selects a preset registered in the camera in advance (P. 62).
(G) Focus
Sets the camera to focus on the subject (P. 61).
(H) Exposure Compensation
Corrects the exposure according to the brightness of the subject (P. 61).
(5)
(2)
(1) (7) (9)(3)
(4) (8)(6)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
HM4x
H730
(M)
(N)
(K) (L)(J)
(F)
(G)
(I)(H)
HM4x
H730
S30
54
(I) Day/Night
Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment (P. 61).
(J) Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move
Switch between Area Zoom and Drag to Move functions for dragging in the video display area (P. 58).
(K) Pan/Tilt/Zoom
If you enable this button (make it purple), the pan/tilt/zoom sliders are displayed on the screen to perform
operations.
The pan slider is displayed on the bottom of the screen, the tilt slider on the left edge of the screen, and the
zoom slider on the right edge of the screen.
(L) BLC (Back Light Compensation)
Turns on/off backlight compensation (P. 62).
(M) Home Position
Move the camera angle to the home position (P. 62).
(N) Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges
Obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 55).
(6) Event and Input/Output Menu
Use external device output (P. 72).
(7) Snapshot
Displays the still image shown when the button was clicked by opening the snapshot panel (P. 67).
(8) Memory Card Recording
Start and stop video recording to a memory card (P. 68).
(9) Information Display
Information, warning and error messages are displayed (P. 50).
HM4x
S30 S31
Camera Viewer
4
55
This section describes the operations and configuration required for using the camera, such as obtaining camera control
privileges, setting the angle and focus.
Obtaining Camera Control Privileges
To use the camera, you must obtain control privileges with the Viewer.
If you have not yet obtained camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button.
You will obtain control privileges and be able to use the buttons on the Viewer.
The center of the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button turns green while you have control privileges.
Camera Control Privilege Status Indicator
Depending on the camera control privilege status, the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button
appearance changes as follows.
Operating the Camera
Important
It is necessary to obtain the camera control privileges to perform the operations and configuration as first described in this section.
Camera control privileges not obtained
Control privileges obtained
Appearance Control Privilege Status Explanation
Control privileges not obtained Camera control privileges have not been obtained.
Waiting for control privileges
When a guest user is waiting to obtain camera control privileges, the
remaining time is counted down.
Control privileges obtained Camera control privileges have been obtained.
Control privileges obtained
(remaining control time)
After a guest user has obtained camera control privileges, the time
that the user can retain control privileges in priority over other guest
users is counted down.
56
Using Pan/Tilt/Zoom
You can pan, tilt and zoom the camera to set the camera angle.
Note
Camera operations using clicking and dragging, do not offer a high precision control of the camera.
The administrator can operate the camera regardless of view restrictions. Authorized and guest users can only operate the camera
within the restricted view.
Clicking on the Video Display Area or Use the Sliders
Moving by Clicking on the Video Display Area
If you click in the video display area, the camera angle will change to center on the mouse pointer location. If the
camera angle does not center on the desired location with a single click, repeat the operation.
Note
Click operations are not available in the video display area while using the Viewer PTZ or Digital PTZ.
Click operations in the video display area become available after starting the Viewer PTZ or Digital PTZ.
Important
Multiple users cannot obtain control privileges simultaneously.
The Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges button is displayed for authorized users and guest users if [Camera Control] is selected
in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority] on the Setting Page.
Administrators can take away camera control privileges from authorized users or guest users. Authorized users can also take away
camera control privileges from guest users.
A user with lower privileges cannot obtain camera control privileges while a user with higher privileges has camera control privileges.
Once finished, the administrator should always exit the Viewer or click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button to
release the control privileges.
Important
The camera is designed to last for a total of 50,000 round-trip pan/tilt operations.
For example, the camera will last for approximately six years if it performs 25 round-trip operations per day.
If the durability limit for pan/tilt operations is exceeded, the camera may not be able to perform focus and zoom operations correctly.
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
H730 S80x S90x
Camera Viewer
4
57
Moving Using the Sliders
Drag the pan and tilt sliders to pan and tilt the camera.
Drag the zoom slider to zoom the camera.
The slider can also move by clicking directly on the slider bar.
Note
Slider operations cannot be performed unless the Viewer PTZ or Digital PTZ is started.
Sliders Used for Digital Zoom and Enhanced Digital Zoom
If you set [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] to [Enable] on the Setting Page (P. 96), the
digital zoom range (orange) will be displayed on the zoom slider and you will be able to use digital zoom.
Also, if you set [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Enhanced Digital Zoom] to [Enable] on the Setting Page
(P. 96), the enhanced digital zoom range (blue) is displayed on the zoom slider and enhanced digital zoom becomes
available.
Enhanced digital zoom performs digital zooming within a range where poor image quality is not apparent, according
to the received video size.
The models that you can use digital zoom and enhanced digital zoom with are indicated below.
Digital zoom
Enhanced digital zoom
Note
The zoom magnification for enhanced digital zoom is limited to the video size set by the user with camera control privileges.
Since other users also use digital zoom with the same zoom ratio, video deterioration may occur, depending on the received
video size.
If you perform a zoom in operation that passes the telephoto end of the enhanced digital zoom area when both the digital zoom
area and enhanced digital zoom area exist, the camera temporarily stops at the telephoto end of the enhanced digital zoom area.
The zoom ratio (digital zoom ratio) is shown in the information display.
With digital zoom, image quality is reduced as the zoom ratio increases.
Zoom Slider
Drag upward to zoom in (telephoto), drag
downward to zoom out (wide-angle).
Tilt Slider
Move the camera vertically.
Pan Slider
Move the camera horizontally.
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
S30
HM4x
S30
HM4x
58
Using Area Zoom/Drag to Move
You can drag on the video display area to zoom in and out, and change the camera angle.
Note
You cannot use Area Zoom or Drag to Move when using Viewer PTZ or Digital PTZ.
Using Area Zoom to Zoom In and Out
Drag left-to-right to define an area to zoom in on.
Drag right-to-left to draw out a frame in which will appear a preview of the video display area that will be zoomed
out to.
When operating in Area Zoom mode, an icon (zoom in: ; zoom out: ) is displayed in the frame.
To stop Area Zoom, right-click with the left mouse button held down, and the frame is displayed.
When dragged left-to-right, the camera will zoom in until the area in the frame fills the video display area.
When dragged right-to-left, the camera will zoom out, centered around the area in the frame.
Digital Zoom Range
Enhanced Digital Zoom Maximum Telephoto
(Temporary Stop Position)
Enhanced Digital Zoom Range
Optical Zoom Range
HM4x
S30
S31
1
Click the [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] button to enter (Area Zoom) mode.
2
Drag out a frame in the video display area.
3
Release the mouse button.
Camera Viewer
4
59
Using Drag to Move to Change the Camera Angle
The camera angle will move in the direction of the arrow.
The maximum length of the arrow is half the width and height of the video display area, and movement speed
increases with the length of the area.
Note
When using Drag to Move, the pan/tilt sliders will not move.
The camera will stop.
Using [Pan/Tilt/Zoom] in the [Camera Control] Menu
Open the [Camera Operation] menu and perform camera pan, tilt, and zoom operations.
1
Click the [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] button to enter (Drag to Move) mode.
2
In the video display area, drag in the direction you would like to change the camera angle. An arrow will be
displayed.
3
Release the mouse button.
HM4x
S30 S31
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
60
(1) [Pan/Tilt]
The camera angle will move in the direction of each arrow. Movement will continue while you hold the button
down, and stop when you release it.
Click the center button to move the camera angle to the midpoint of the pan/tilt range of motion. However, if a
view restriction is set (P. 115) and the midpoint is outside the restrict view area, the camera angle moves to the
edge of the restrict view area.
(2) Pan/Tilt Speed
Set the operation speed by the [Pan/Tilt] button.
(3) [Zoom]
Click the (Zoom in) and (Zoom out) buttons. Movement will continue while you hold the button down,
and stop when you release it.
(4) Zoom Speed
Set the operation speed by the [Zoom] button.
Note
Even if you change the pan/tilt speed or zoom speed setting, the speed of pan/tilt/zoom operations on the slider or panorama does
not change.
Operating the Camera with the Panorama Display Panel
You can operate the camera using the frames within the panorama display panel.
To display a panorama image in the panorama display panel, you must create the image and save it to the camera
(P. 110).
The [Panorama Display] panel is shown in the control display area.
The frame indicates the area being captured by the current camera.
Move or Zoom by Dragging
Click inside the frame and drag it to pan and tilt the camera.
If you click and drag outside the frame, a new frame will be drawn. The camera will pan/tilt/zoom to capture the
area in the frame.
If you drag an edge of the frame to change its size, the camera will zoom in or out to capture the area in the
frame.
HM4x
S30 S31
1
Click the [Panorama Display] button.
2
Use the frame in the panorama display panel to pan/tilt/zoom the camera.
Frame
Camera Viewer
4
61
Move by Clicking
If you click outside the frame, the frame will move and center on that point, panning and tilting the camera.
Adjusting Video
Open the [Camera Operation] menu to operate focus, exposure compensation and day/night function.
Focusing
Focus on the subject.
[Auto]
Focusing is performed automatically.
[Manual]
You can click and hold the (Near) and (Far) buttons to adjust the focus in the near and far directions.
[Fixed at infinity]
You can set the focus so that it is fixed near infinity.
Note
For cautions on using Focus, see the “Important” section on P. 101.
For information on the range of focus, please refer to the table on P. 102.
Setting the Exposure Compensation
Adjust the brightness of the video.
Move the slider to a negative value to make the video darker or a positive value to make the video lighter.
Switching Day/Night
Set the shooting mode according to the brightness of the installation environment of the camera.
For details on this function, see [Day/Night] on “Setting Page” (P. 105).
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
S30
Important
Cannot be set when [Exposure] is set to [Manual] on the Setting Page (P. 102).
Cannot be set when [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] on the Setting Page (P. 104).
Important
Day/night can be set by the administrator and authorized users with privileged camera control.
For cautions on using Day/Night, see the “Important” section on P. 106.
62
Using Backlight Compensation
Click [BLC] to brighten video that is dark due to backlight.
The back light compensation button becomes active (purple) while backlight compensation is being performed.
Click the button again to cancel backlight compensation.
Note
If bright areas are overexposed, use [Smart Shade Control] on the Setting Page.
Using Presets or the Home Position
It is possible to control the camera using a preset or home position registered to the camera in advance.
When you click the preset selection menu and select a preset from the list that is displayed, the camera will be set to the
registered setting of the selected preset.
Clicking the [Home Position] button will set the camera to the registered setting of the home position.
Note
Register preset/home positions in advance in [Camera] > [Preset] > [Register Preset] (P. 118) on the Setting Page.
The registered preset is displayed in the preset selection menu.
Important
You cannot use the [BLC] button if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] on the Setting Page.
You cannot use the [BLC] button if [Exposure] is set to [Manual] on the Setting Page.
[Home Position] Button
Preset Selection Menu
Camera Viewer
4
63
Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ are both functions which allow easy panning, tilting and zooming using the digital zoom.
Magnifying and Display Part of Video (Viewer PTZ)
You can use the Viewer PTZ to magnify part of a video (using digital zoom) without moving the camera.
This feature does not use the camera’s pan, tilt, or zoom features, making it useful for situations like the use of the intelligent
function, where you do not want to change the camera position.
Note
You cannot record the video magnified with the Viewer PTZ.
You can display the magnified video in full screen mode when using the Viewer PTZ.
The [Viewer PTZ] button changes active (purple), and the Viewer PTZ panel is shown in the control display area.
Initially, the preview frame (light blue) surrounds the entire video.
The video of the area inside the preview frame is magnified to fill the video display area.
Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ
Viewer PTZ Digital PTZ
Enlarges the specified part of the video transmitted from the
camera and then displays it in the viewer.
Transmits only the cropped part of the entire area that can
be captured by the camera.
The size of the received data is large. The size of the received data is small.
Camera control is not required. Camera control is required.
PTZ operation can be performed independently for each
Viewer.
Independent operation cannot be performed by each
Viewer. If multiple Viewers are connected, the same Digital
PTZ display is applied to the other Viewers.
Custom trim size Five levels of trim size
Important
You cannot perform camera operations by clicking/dragging in the video display area while using the Viewer PTZ.
HM4x
S30 S31
1
Click the [Viewer PTZ] button.
2
In the Viewer PTZ panel, drag an edge of the preview frame to make it smaller.
64
Move or Resize by Dragging
Press the mouse button inside the frame and drag it to move the preview frame.
If you press the mouse button and drag outside the frame, a new preview frame will be drawn.
You can resize the preview frame by dragging an edge of the frame.
Move by Clicking
If you click outside the frame, the preview frame will move and center on that point.
Move Using the Sliders/Resize
You can use the pan and tilt sliders in the video display area to move the preview frame. You can use the zoom
slider to resize the image within preview frame.
Note
The Viewer PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the quality of the video.
Exiting Viewer PTZ
The Viewer PTZ exits if you perform one of the following operations.
Click the [Viewer PTZ] button to disable it.
Click the [Digital PTZ] button to start the Digital PTZ.
Note
You can also perform the following operations to retain the zoomed view of the video display area without exiting the Viewer PTZ
while the [Viewer PTZ] button is active (purple).
Click the [Close] button on the control display area to close the Viewer PTZ panel.
Click the snapshot tab or panorama display tab ( ) to switch the panel in the control display area.
Cropping and Displaying Part of an Image (Digital PTZ)
You can use the Digital PTZ panel to crop and display part of a camera image in the image display area.
Note
If you enable Digital PTZ while receiving H.264 video, the received video is switched to JPEG.
3
Move the frame to the area you would like to magnify and resize the frame as desired.
Preview Frame
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
S30
S31
Camera Viewer
4
65
Cropping Video With Digital PTZ Panel
The [Digital PTZ] button changes active (purple), and the Digital PTZ panel is shown in the control display area.
The preview frame operations are the same as with the Viewer PTZ (P. 63).
The preview frame size can be set to any of 5 sizes. The screen sizes according to the setting in [Basic] > [Video]
> [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] (P. 91) on the Setting Page.
When the aspect ratio 16:9 is selected: 640 x 360, 512 x 288, 384 x 216, 256 x 144, 128 x 72
When the aspect ratio 4:3 is selected: 640 x 480, 512 x 384, 384 x 288, 256 x 192, 128 x 96
Note
The preview frame will move in steps. Fine-tuned movement is not possible.
The video of the area inside the manipulated preview frame is magnified to fill the video display area.
Note
The Digital PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.
1
Click the [Digital PTZ] button.
2
In the Digital PTZ panel, move and resize the preview frame.
Important
Even if the camera angle is changed due to a slider operation or preset, the position of the preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel
is fixed.
Preview Frame
HM4x
S30
S31
66
Using Presets or the Home Position
You can use a registered preset or home position to specify the range for Digital PTZ.
If you select a preset, the preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel moves to the preset position, and the video inside
the frame is shown in the video display area.
Note
Register presets in advance in [Camera] > [Preset] > [Register Preset] on the Setting Page (P. 118).
Exiting Digital PTZ
The Digital PTZ exits if you perform one of the following operations.
Click the [Digital PTZ] button to disable it.
Click the [Viewer PTZ] button to start the Viewer PTZ.
Note
You can perform the following operations to continue Digital PTZ while the [Digital PTZ] button is active (purple).
Click the [Close] button on the control display area to close the Digital PTZ panel.
Click the snapshot tab or panorama display tab ( ) to switch the panel in the control display area.
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
S30
S31
Camera Viewer
4
67
You can take snapshots while checking the video in the video display area.
The snapshot panel is opened in the control display area and the still image from the instant that the button was
clicked is displayed.
If you click the [Snapshot] button again, the image displayed in the Snapshot panel will be updated.
Note
The snapshot is saved as a JPEG file.
The saved snapshots are the same size as the reception video size.
Saving Snapshots
1
Click the [Snapshot] button at the moment you want to capture a still image.
2
To save the snapshot, right-click on the Snapshot panel.
3
Click [Save picture as] in the menu that is displayed.
4
Enter the desired file name and save the snapshot.
68
Manually record video being shown in the video display area to a memory card inserted in the camera.
Note
You can manually record video if the following conditions have been met.
The memory card inserted in the camera is mounted.
[Operation Settings] is set to [Save Logs and Videos] in [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] (P. 196) on the Setting Page.
The format and size of the video recorded to a memory card depends on the settings configured on the Setting Page.
Video format: [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] > [Video Format] (P. 197)
Video size: JPEG [Basic] > [Video] > [JPEG] > [Video Size: Upload / Memory card]
H.264 [Basic] > [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] > [Video Size]
Recording Videos Manually
The display of the [Memory Card Recording] button will change during video recording.
Recording Video to a Memory Card
1
If you have not obtained camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button to
obtain the privileges.
2
Click the [Memory Card Recording] button.
Recording
Recording (while camera control privileges are not obtained)
Not recording (while camera control privileges are obtained)
Not recording (while camera control privileges are not obtained, or when no memory card is mounted to
the camera)
3
To stop video recording, click the [Memory Card Recording] button again.
Important
Video manually recorded to the memory card will automatically be terminated after 300 seconds of recording.
When recording manually, do not change the settings in the [Settings Page]. Doing so may result in the termination of the
manual recording.
While manually recording to the memory card, you can continue to record even if you release camera control privileges or
disconnect the camera.
Camera Viewer
4
69
Confirming Recorded Video
Use the Recorded Video Utility to confirm and play back the video manually recorded to a memory card.
For details, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.
70
Open the [Video and Audio] menu to set the audio reception from the camera, the audio transmission from the Viewer and
the corresponding volumes.
Receiving Audio
Receive audio from the microphone connected to the camera and play it back in the Viewer.
Audio reception starts.
The [Audio Reception] button icon will change to active (purple) while receiving audio.
Note
To receive audio, you must connect the microphone to the camera and set [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio] >
[Audio Input] to [Enable] (P. 135) and set [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera]
to [Enable] (P. 136) on the Setting Page.
While the icon is active (purple), audio is constantly received even if you close the [Video and Audio] menu.
However, even if the icon is active (purple), audio input from the microphone will not be received because there is no sound sent
from the camera in the following cases.
While the administrator is transmitting audio when [Audio Communication Method] is set to [Half Duplex] in [Video and Audio]
> [Audio] > [General Audio] on the Setting Page (P. 136)
Transmitting Audio
You can transmit audio received from an external device connected to the computer to a speaker with an amplifier
connected to the camera.
Audio transmission starts.
The [Audio Transmission] button icon will change to active (purple) while transmitting audio.
Receiving/Transmitting Audio
1
In the [Video and Audio] menu, click the [Audio Reception] button.
2
In [Output Volume], adjust the volume to an appropriate level using the slider.
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
1
In the [Video and Audio] menu, select the maximum audio transmission time.
2
Click the [Audio Transmission] button.
Camera Viewer
4
71
Note
To transmit audio, you must first set [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] to [Enable] on
the Setting Page (P. 137).
While the icon is active (purple), audio is constantly transmitted even if you close the [Video and Audio] menu.
If [Audio Communication Method] is set to [Half Duplex] in [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio] on the Setting Page
(P. 136), there is no sound sent from the camera to other users while the administrator is transmitting audio. Therefore, even if the
[Audio Reception] button (P. 70) is active (purple), audio input from the microphone cannot be received.
3
In [Input Volume], adjust the volume to an appropriate level using the slider.
72
In the [Event and Input/Output] menu, you can operate the output of an external device and check the status of input of
the external device, detection of intelligent functions, and occurrence of linked events.
Operating External Device Output
You can operate output for the external device set in [Event] > [External Device] (P. 149) on the Setting Page.
Click the icon to switch between the active (purple)/inactive (gray) status.
Example:
Output 1: Output active
Output 2: Output inactive
Note
To operate [External Device Output] output, it is necessary to obtain camera control privileges.
Checking the Status of Event Detection
(1) [External Device Input]
Displays the input status of the external device set in [Event] > [External Device] (P. 150) on the Setting Page.
When a contact input signal is received from an external device, input will be activated and the icon becomes green.
Example:
Input 1: Input inactive
Input 2: Input active
Checking the Status of Event Detection
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
HM4x
H730
S30 S31 S80x
S90x
Camera Viewer
4
73
(2) [Intelligent Function (Video Detection)]
The status of video detection set in [Event] > [Intelligent Function] > [Video Detection] (P. 161) is displayed for each
detection setting number. When the detection settings configured in Intelligent Function (Moving Object Detection,
Abandoned Object Detection, Removed Object Detection, Camera Tampering Detection, Passing Detection, or
Intrusion Detection) are triggered, the corresponding icon will turn green.
If a name is entered in [Detection Settings Name] in [Event] > [Intelligent Function] on the Setting Page (P. 166), that
name is displayed in [Setting 1] - [Setting 15].
Example:
Setting 1: Video Detection status ON
Other settings: Video Detection status OFF
Note
The icon indicating the detection status will be displayed for a maximum of five minutes (except for Moving Object Detection).
(3) [Intelligent Function (Audio Detection)]
Displays the status of [Volume Detection] or [Scream Detection] set in [Event] > [Audio Detection] (P. 152) on the
Setting Page. If detection is triggered, the icon will turn green.
Example:
Volume: Volume Detection status ON
Scream: Scream Detection status OFF
(4) [Linked Events]
Displays the status of linked events set with [Event] > [Linked Event] (P. 181) on the Setting Page. If a linked event is
triggered, the icon will turn green.
Example:
Setting 2: Linked Event status ON
Other settings: Linked Event status OFF
74
Chapter
Setting Page
The Setting Page enables you to configure all the settings required for using the camera. Please configure the
settings on the Setting page according to how the camera will be used, before you use the camera.
The Setting Page also provides menus for when the camera is in operation; for example, camera maintenance.
76
This section explains operations up to displaying the Setting Page, and common Setting Page operations.
Note
The Setting Page can only be operated by administrators.
Use the Camera Management Tool in advance to configure the administrator account and network settings.
Accessing the Setting Page
Directly enter the IP address set in the Camera Management Tool into a web browser to display the Setting Page of the
camera.
Note
You can also access the Setting Page from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User
Manual”.
The user authentication window is displayed.
The Setting Page is displayed.
Note
The Viewer is displayed when [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] is set to [Display Viewer] in the setting menu (P. 94).
Settings Menu
(1) [Viewer] Button
Start the Camera Viewer (P. 41).
(2) Language Switch Button
Set the language to display on the screen.
(3) Setting Menus
If you click one of these items, its submenu (P. 80) will be displayed (excluding the [Memory Card] and [User
Page] menus). Click a submenu to navigate to its Setting Page.
How to Use the Setting Page
1
Launch the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address, and press the Enter key.
3
Enter the Administrator Name and Administrator Password and click [OK].
(3)
(1) (2)
Setting Page
5
77
Common Setting Page Operations
This section explains basic Setting Page operations, and operations common to all Setting Pages.
Note
If you have enabled settings in your web browser to not display dialog boxes, you may be unable to perform operations on the Setting
Page. If this happens, exit your web browser and launch it again.
Applying Changes to Settings
If you change a setting on the Setting Page, the [Apply] and [Clear] buttons on the upper right or lower right of the
screen is no longer grayed out and can be clicked.
Click [Apply] in this state to apply the changed settings.
Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.
Setting Changes Requiring Rebooting
Items that require the camera to be rebooted in order to apply the changed settings are indicated with an orange
symbol to their right.
When any item indicated with an orange symbol is changed, [Apply] displayed at the upper right and lower right of
each Setting Page changes to [Apply and reboot].
Click [Apply and reboot] to apply the changed settings and reboot the camera.
Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.
Return to the Settings Menu
Click [Settings Menu] at the upper right of each Setting Page to return to the setting menu.
Important
If you open another window or tab to access the camera while an authenticated web page is displayed, the authentication
information of the displayed web page may be discarded. In this case, enter the authentication information again.
To ensure security, exit the web browser after completing settings on the Setting Page and after using the Camera Viewer.
Do not open multiple Setting Pages at one time and try to change the settings of a single camera.
Important
Setting changes will be lost if you navigate to another Setting Page without clicking [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. Be sure to click
[Apply] or [Apply and reboot] to apply the changed settings. However, changes for [Initial Settings] are saved even if you navigate
to another page without clicking [Apply], so click [Clear] if you want to discard those settings.
Important
Do not use the [Back] or [Forward] buttons in the web browser to navigate Setting Pages. The changed settings may revert to the
original settings or unwanted setting changes may be applied.
78
Help
Click [Help] at the beginning of any setting item to display a detailed explanation of that setting item.
Setting Ranges and Character Limits
For settings where you must enter numerical values or characters, the setting range or limits on the number of
characters will be displayed.
Please enter the settings within the displayed limits.
Operating the Video Display Area
Some Setting Pages such as [Initial Settings], [Preset] and [Intelligent Function] can be configured using the video display
area.
Note
The displayed items will change depending on the Setting Page.
Other users cannot access the Viewer while video is being displayed on the Setting Page. Also, video cannot be displayed or configured
while the administrator is connected to the Viewer.
(1) Video Display Area
Camera video is displayed here. Use the mouse to set the areas, etc. The operations on the video display area
are the same as in the Viewer (P. 56).
You can perform the following operations while the cursor is [+] in the video display area for some Setting
Pages.
Centering the camera angle to the position you click (P. 56)
Area zoom operations (P. 58)
(5)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(1) (3)
(4)
(6)(2)
(2)
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
Setting Page
5
79
(2) Pan/Tilt Slider
Pan and tilt operations are the same as in the viewer (P. 57).
(3) Zoom Slider
Zoom operations are the same as in the viewer (P. 57).
(4) Panorama Screen/Full-View Screen
Displays the full range of motion of the camera. You can set areas, etc. using mouse operations on the
panorama screen for some Setting Pages.
If a panorama image is registered in the camera (P. 110), the panorama image is displayed.
(5) [Snapshot] Button
Open the snapshot window and display a still image of the moment you clicked the button (P. 67).
(6) [Reconnect] Button
Reconnects to the camera. You can use this when not connecting to the camera.
(7) [Screen Resize] Button
The size of the video display area is switched each time this button is clicked.
(8) [Switch Mouse Operation] Button
Click this button to perform camera pan/tilt operations on the video display area using the mouse while the
button is purple.
(9) [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button
Click this to obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 55).
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
80
About Each Setting Page
This section will give an overview of each item in the Settings Menu and each submenu.
Each of the [Basic], [Video and Audio], and [Video Record] menus has a [Video] submenu, but the functions are all
common. The functions can be set in any of the menus and the settings will be reflected in all of the [Video] submenus.
Network (P. 83)
Network settings for connecting to the camera.
User Management (P. 87)
Use this to change administrator account information, add/
delete authorized users and set privileges for users.
The settings of this item are the same as those in [Security]
> [User Management]. Settings configured on one page
are also reflected on the other.
Date and Time (P. 89)
Camera date and time settings.
Video (P. 91)
General video settings, such as the size and quality of
video transmitted from the camera.
•Viewer (P.94)
Configure the startup, authorization, and view of the
Viewer.
Basic
Camera Camera (P. 96)
Settings for the camera name and external input/output
devices, and for use and installation of the camera.
Initial Settings (P. 99)
Sets initial settings, such as video quality compensation, at
camera start up.
Day/Night Mode Focus (P. 107)
Set the focus positions for when Day/Night Mode are
switched.
Panorama (P. 110)
Configure the creation and management of panorama
images.
View restriction (P. 114)
Set the range that the camera can capture.
Preset (P. 118)
Register a series of settings as a preset.
Preset Tour (P. 121)
Configure the settings for automatically touring with
multiple presets registered in advance.
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
S80x
S90x
Setting Page
5
81
Video Record Video (P. 91)
Upload (P. 144)
Settings for uploading video via HTTP or FTP when an
event is triggered.
Memory Card (P. 196)
Perform memory card operations or configure settings.
The settings of this item are the same as those of the
[Memory Card] menu. Settings configured on one page
are also reflected on the other.
E-mail Notification (P. 148)
Settings for sending an e-mail notification to a specified
recipient when an event is triggered.
Server Server (P. 138)
Settings for HTTP server, SNMP server, FTP server usage
or WS-Security time checks.
Video Server (P. 141)
Settings for clients that can be connected to a video
server.
Audio Server (P. 136)
Settings for audio transmission from the camera to the
computer, and audio reception from the computer to the
camera.
The settings of this item are the same as those in [Video
and Audio] > [Audio] > [Audio Server]. Settings configured
on one page are also reflected on the other.
RTP Server (P. 142)
Settings for RTP streaming.
Video and Audio Video (P. 91)
ADSR (P. 126)
ADSR is an abbreviation for Area-specific Data Size
Reduction.
Reduces the data size of transmitted H.264 video by
reducing the video quality of unspecified area.
On-screen display (P. 129)
Displays the date and time, camera name and other text
on the Video.
Privacy Mask (P. 131)
Configure a mask for the areas of the camera video you
want to mask.
Audio (P. 135)
Settings for audio input from the microphone connected to
the camera, audio output from the Viewer and playback of
a sound clip.
The setting items in [Audio Server] are the same as those
in [Sever] > [Audio Server]. Settings configured on one
page are also reflected on the other.
82
Security
Memory Card (P. 196)
Maintenance
User Management (P. 87)
The settings of this item are the same as those of the [User
Management] in [Basic] menu. Settings configured on one
page are also reflected on the other.
Host Access Restrictions (P. 185)
Separate access control from IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
can be set.
SSL/TLS (P. 187)
Certificate creation and management, and encrypted
communication settings.
802.1X (P. 190)
Settings for 802.1X authentication and authentication
status display, and for certificate management.
•IPsec (P.192)
Settings for using IPsec.
Settings for recording video to a memory card when an event
is triggered.
The settings of this item are the same as those in [Video
Record] > [Memory Card]. Settings configured on one page
are also reflected on the other.
General (P. 199)
Check the device information/settings, and licenses, and
reboot and initialize the device, etc.
Backup / Restore (P. 201)
Perform backup and restoration.
Update Firmware (P. 202)
Perform firmware updates.
Log (P. 203)
Display logs and configure log notification.
User Page
Link to web page customized by the user.
For information on the User Page, contact a Canon Customer Service Center.
Event
External Device (P. 149)
Operation settings for external device output and for
external device input triggered events.
Audio Detection (P. 152)
Detected changes in audio input from the microphone
connected to the camera can trigger operations such as
video recording or e-mail notification.
•Timer (P.155)
The timer function can generate events that can trigger
operations, such as video recording and e-mail
notifications, at regular intervals.
Intelligent Function (P. 157)
Configure the intelligent functions such as moving object
detection, camera tampering detection, and intrusion
detection.
Switch Day/Night (P. 180)
The camera angle can be moved to preset positions when
Day Mode and Night Mode are switched.
Linked Event (P. 181)
By linking two types of events, a single event is triggered.
Setting Page
5
83
Network settings for connecting to the camera.
LAN
Set the LAN communication method and size of video transmitted from the camera.
[LAN Interface]
Select the interface suited to the device for connecting to the camera. Generally use [Auto].
[Maximum Packet Size]
Enter the maximum packet size to be transmitted by the camera. Normally there is no need to change the default setting of
1500.
A setting of 1280 or greater is necessary when using IPv6.
When using ADSL, setting a slightly lower value may increase transmission efficiency.
IPv4
Settings for using IPv4 to connect to the camera. The IPv4 address can be assigned by the DHCP server automatically or
set manually.
[Basic] > [Network]
Configuring Network Settings
Important
If any network settings are changed, the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser. In this case, a confirmation
dialog box will be displayed when you click [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. Click [OK] to apply the new settings.
If you reboot the camera after changing settings and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for
connecting to the camera will be displayed in a message. If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your
system administrator.
The following settings can be configured here.
•LAN
•IPv4
•IPv6
DNS
mDNS
84
[IPv4 Address Settings Method
Select the method for setting the IPv4 address.
For [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address into [IPv4 Address].
For [Auto (DHCP)], the settings acquired from the DHCP server will be automatically entered in [IPv4 Address], [Subnet
Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address].
[IPv4 Address]
When [IPv4 Address Settings Method] is set to [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address.
[Subnet Mask]
When [IPv4 Address Settings Method] is set to [Manual], enter the designated subnet mask values for each network.
[IPv4 Default Gateway Address]
When [IPv4 Address Settings Method] is set to [Manual], enter a default gateway IP address. Be sure to set this when
connecting the camera to a different subnet from that of the Viewer.
[AutoIP]
Select this to enable or disable AutoIP.
[IPv4 Address (AutoIP)]
When [AutoIP] is set to [Enable], an automatically set IPv4 address is displayed.
IPv6
Settings for using IPv6 to connect to the camera. The IPv6 address can be assigned by the RA or DHCPv6 server
automatically or set manually.
[IPv6]
Select this to enable or disable IPv6.
[Auto (RA)]
Select [Enable] to set an address automatically using RA (Router Advertisement, network information automatically
transmitted from a router).
[Auto (DHCPv6)]
Select [Enable] to use DHCPv6 to set an address automatically.
[IPv6 Address (Manual)]
Enter a fixed IPv6 address if you set the address manually.
[Prefix Length]
Enter a prefix length if [Disable] is specified in [Auto (RA)].
Important
Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address] if you set the IPv4
address manually.
If any of the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] or [IPv4 Default Gateway Address] settings are wrong, the camera may become
inaccessible via the network. If this occurs, use the Camera Management Tool to reset the address.
Important
If [Auto (DHCP)] is selected as the IPv4 address setting method, the IPv4 address may not be assigned correctly in certain environments,
such as when a router is present between the DHCP server and the camera. If this occurs, select [Manual] and enter a fixed IPv4
address.
Important
Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv6 Address (Manual)], [Prefix Length] and [IPv6 Default Gateway Address] if you set the
IPv6 address manually.
Setting Page
5
85
[IPv6 Default Gateway Address]
Enter a default gateway address if [Disable] is specified in [Auto (RA)]. Be sure to set this when connecting the camera to a
different subnet from that of the Viewer.
[IPv6 Address (Auto)]
If [Enable] is specified in [IPv6] and [Enable] is specified in [Auto (RA)] and [Auto (DHCPv6)], then the automatically
acquired address will be displayed.
Note
In an environment where IPv6 cannot be used, and IPv6/Auto is set to [Enable], then only the link-local address will be displayed in the
[IPv6 Address (Auto)] field.
DNS
Set the DNS server address. The DNS server address can be set manually or automatically assigned by a DHCP/DHCPv6
server.
[Name Server Address 1], [Name Server Address 2]
Enter the name server address you want to register. To register only one address, keep the [Name Server Address 2] field
blank.
Note
If [Name Server Address 1] is unavailable, [Name Server Address 2] will be accessed. However, [Name Server Address 2] must be set in
advance.
[Set Name Server Address Automatically]
Select the server to use for automatically setting the name server address.
To set [Use DHCP], select [Auto (DHCP)] in [IPv4 Address Settings Method] (P. 84).
To set [Use DHCPv6], select [Enable] in [IPv6], then select [Enable] in [Auto (DHCPv6)] (P. 84).
[Name Server Address (DHCP)]
Select [Use DHCP] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Set Name Server Address Automatically] to display the name server
address acquired from the DHCP server.
[Name Server Address (DHCPv6)]
Select [Use DHCPv6] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Set Name Server Address Automatically] to display the name server
address acquired from the DHCPv6 server.
[Host Name]
You can register the camera host name in the name server using alphanumeric characters.
Do not use “_” (underscore) in the host name in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.
[Host Name Registration with DDNS]
When you enter a name into [Host Name] and select [Register], the host name will be registered in the name server.
Registering the host name to DDNS is useful when operating with [IPv4 Address Settings Method] set to [Auto (DHCP)]
(P. 84). DNS server registration settings must be set in advance. Contact your system administrator for the DNS server
settings.
[Search Domain]
Enter a domain name and click [Add] to add the domain name to the Search Domain List.
Specify the host name without specifying a domain name for a server, such as the upload server, to search domains in the
form “host name + domain name”, when the domain names are specified in the Search Domain List.
Do not use “_” (underscore) in the domain name in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.
[Search Domain List]
A list of domain names added using [Search Domain].
The function queries the DNS server for each domain name starting from the top of the list.
Use the ▲▼ buttons on the right to change the order of the domain names.
To delete a domain name, select one from the list and then click [Delete].
86
mDNS
This will configure settings for using multicast DNS. If you use mDNS, the IP address and host name of the camera will be
broadcast to other hosts on the network.
[Use mDNS]
Select this to enable or disable mDNS.
Setting Page
5
87
You can change the administrator account, add new authorized users, and set the privileges for authorized users and guest
users.
For details on user privileges, please refer to “Camera Viewer Access Restrictions” (P. 43).
[User Management] is the same as [Security] > [User Management]. Settings configured on one [User Management] page
are also reflected on the other.
Administrator Account
Set this when changing the account information for the administrator.
[Administrator Name]
Enter the administrator name using alphanumeric characters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).
[Password]
Enter the administrator password.
If the Camera Viewer, etc., are connected, terminate the connection before changing the password.
[Confirm Password]
Enter the same password as above for confirmation.
Authorized User Account
Add authorized users.
[User Name], [Password], [Confirm Password]
To add the authorized user, enter the user name and password, then click [Add].
Enter the user name using alphanumeric characters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).
Up to 50 authorized users can be added.
[User List]
Displays a list of added authorized users.
The order of the list can be changed with the ▲▼ buttons on the right.
[Basic] > [User Management]
Configuring Accounts and Privileges
Important
To ensure system security, change the administrator password periodically. Do not forget the new password.
If you forget the administrator password, restore the factory default settings (P. 225). Note, however, that this will reset all camera
settings to factory default settings including the administrator account, the network information, date and time.
The following settings can be configured here.
Administrator Account
Authorized User Account
User Authority
88
To delete an authorized user from the list, select the user and click [Delete].
User Authority
Set the privileges for authorized users and guest users. This setting enables you to set access restrictions for the Camera
Viewer (P. 43).
[Privileged Camera Control], [Camera Control], [Video Distribution], [Audio Distribution]
Select the items for granting users privileges.
An authorized user has higher privileges than a guest user.
Setting Page
5
89
Camera date and time settings.
Current Date and Time
The date and time set in the camera are displayed.
Settings
Set the date and time setting method, time zone and daylight saving time for the camera.
[Settings Method]
Select the date and time setting method.
[Set manually]
Set the desired date and time in [Date] and [Time].
Set the time in 24-hour format in <hour:minute:second> order.
[Synchronize with NTP server]
Synchronize with the time of NTP server specified in the displayed [Set NTP Server Settings Automatically].
[Set NTP Server Settings Automatically]
Select one of the following setting methods.
[Disable]
Enter the IP address or host name of the NTP server in [NTP Server].
[Use DHCP]
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP server.
The acquired NTP server address is displayed in [NTP Server (DHCP)].
In order to set [Use DHCP], you must change [Network] > [IPv4] > [IPv4 Address Settings Method] to [Auto
(DHCP)] (P. 84).
[Use DHCPv6]
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCPv6 server.
The acquired NTP server address is displayed in [NTP Server (DHCPv6)].
In order to set [Use DHCPv6], you must change [Network] > [IPv6] > [IPv6] to [Enable], then set [Auto (DHCPv6)]
to [Enable] (P. 84).
[Use DHCP/DHCPv6]
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP server or
DHCPv6 server.
If the NTP server address can be acquired from both the DHCP server (IPv4) and DHCPv6 server, the NTP server
address acquired from the DHCP server (IPv4) will be used.
[Synchronization Interval (minutes)]
Enter the synchronization interval for the specified NTP server.
[Basic] > [Date and Time]
Setting the Date/Time
The following settings can be configured here.
Current Date and Time
•Settings
90
[Last Sync Time]
The time last synchronized with the specified NTP server will be displayed.
[Synchronize with computer time]
The date and time will be synchronized with that of the computer currently accessing the camera. After clicking [Apply],
[Settings Method] will change to [Set manually].
[Time Zone] is not automatically selected, so set it if necessary.
Note
If the NTP server IP address is incorrect or a connection with the NTP server cannot otherwise be established, [Last Sync Time] will not be
updated, or will be blank.
[Time Zone]
Select the appropriate time zone.
When the time zone is changed and [Apply] is selected, the date and time will be automatically changed based on the
selected time zone.
[Daylight Saving Time]
Select whether to automatically adjust for daylight saving time to suit the time zone.
Setting Page
5
91
General video settings, such as the size and quality of JPEG and H.264 video transmitted from the camera.
[Video] is common with [Video] found in [Video and Audio] and [Video Record]. A setting configured in any of the [Video]
submenus will be reflected in the other [Video] submenus as well.
All Videos
Set the video size sets used by the camera.
All options in the [Video] submenu and the size sets that can be selected in [Video Size] in all of the Setting Pages are
determined by the video size set selected here.
This also determines the video sizes and screen sizes that can be selected by each Viewer.
[Video Size Set]
Categories and aspect ratios vary according to each video size set.
* For VB-M44, VB-S805D Mk II and VB-S905F Mk II, [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] cannot be set for [Video Size Set].
[Basic] > [Video]
Setting Video Size and Quality
Important
The following may occur if video size, video quality and target bit rate are set higher, as this increases network load and data size per
frame.
JPEG: The frame rate may drop
H.264: Video may be temporarily disrupted
In case of H.264 video, block noise may become noticeable if a large video size and low target bit rate are set.
The data size may increase depending on the type or movement of the subject. If the frame rate remains low or other undesirable
conditions continue for a prolonged period, lower the video size or quality setting.
The RM-Lite can only record JPEG video.
[Video Size Set] Category Aspect Ratio
[1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270]* 1080p 16:9
[1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180] 720p 16:9
[1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240] 4:3 4:3
The following settings can be configured here.
All Videos
•JPEG
H.264(1)
H.264(2)
92
JPEG
You can configure settings for the quality and size of JPEG video transmitted from the camera, as well as, the video size
when recording the camera video.
The video sizes that can be set or selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.
[Video Quality]
Select the video quality transmitted from the camera for each size in a video size set.
Greater values have higher quality.
[Video Quality: Digital PTZ]
Select the video quality for digital PTZ.
[Video Size: video Transmission]
Select the default video size transmitted from the camera when no video size has been specified by the Viewer.
[Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission]
Limit the maximum frame rate per second transmitted to reduce the viewer load. Up to 30 frames per second can be set.
[Video Size: Upload / Memory card]
Select the size of video when using the upload function (P. 144) or when recording to a memory card (P. 196).
Set whether to upload a video or record it to a memory card with [Video Record] > [Upload] or [Memory Card] > [Video
Record Action] (P. 144).
H.264(1)
Settings for H.264(1) video transmitted from the camera.
The video sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.
[Video Size]
Select the size of the video transmitted from the camera.
[Bit Rate Control]
Set the video bit rate.
If you select [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)], please set [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]. If you select [Do not use bit rate
control (variable bit rate)], please set [Video Quality].
[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]
You can select the target bit rate if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)].
[Video Quality]
You can select the video quality if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Do not use bit rate control (variable bit rate)].
Greater values have higher quality.
[Frame Rate (fps)]
Select the video frame rate.
[I Frame Interval (sec)]
Select the I frame interval (sec) for H.264 video.
Important
Changing the [Video Size Set] selection and clicking [Apply and reboot] will disconnect all connections and then change all the video
sizes. Consequently, users connected to the camera must reconnect.
If the [Video Size Set] selection is changed, review the following settings and check the operation.
ADSR (P. 127)
Privacy Mask (P. 131)
Intelligent Function (P. 157)
Preset (P. 118)
View Restriction (P. 115)
HM4x
S30 S31
Setting Page
5
93
H.264(2)
Settings for H.264(2) video transmitted from the camera.
The video sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.
[H.264(2)]
Select [Enable] to dual stream H.264 video.
[Video Size], [Bit Rate Control], [Target Bit Rate (kbps)], [Video Quality], [Frame Rate (fps)], [I Frame Interval (sec)]
Please refer to each setting in “H.264(1)”.
Important
When [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] video is used for memory card recording and upload, the following restrictions apply to the setting.
[Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)] only
[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less
[I Frame Interval (sec)]: either [0.5], [1], or [1.5]
When dual streaming H.264 videos, setting the video size for H.264(1) and H.264(2) to the following combinations restricts the frame
rate to a maximum of 15 fps. For all other combinations, a frame rate of up to 30 fps can be selected.
H.264(1) H.264(2)
1920 x 1080 All sizes
All sizes 1920 x 1080
1280 x 960 1280 x 960
1280 x 720 1280 x 720
94
Configure the startup, authorization, and view of the Viewer.
General
[Default Page]
Sets the Setting Page or the Viewer as the first page to display when the camera is connected.
If users other than the administrator use the Viewer, set [Default Page] to [Display Viewer].
Viewer Settings
[User Authentication]
Displays the user authentication screen when the camera is connected to the Viewer (P. 41). If you select [Authenticate],
only the administrator or an authorized user (P. 87) can connect.
[Rotate Video Display]
If you select [Rotate clockwise 90 degrees] or [Rotate counterclockwise 90 degrees], video is displayed in portrait
orientation in the Camera Viewer. Use this to rotate the camera 90° to capture video in portrait orientation.
Note
Rotation of the video display only affects the Viewer. The video in the video display area of the Setting Page is not rotated. Uploads and
video stored on the memory card are not rotated.
If you rotate the video display, the on-screen display is also rotated.
[Basic] > [Viewer]
Configuring the Viewer
The following settings can be configured here.
General
Viewer Settings
H730 S80x
S90x
Camera Viewer video when [Rotate clockwise 90 degrees] is set
Setting Page
5
95
[H.264 for Guest Users]
Set whether guest users may receive H.264 video. If you select [Enable], the [H.264] button will be displayed even when a
guest user connects to the viewer (P. 47).
If you select [Enable], the [CANON SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT] dialog box is displayed. Click [Yes] to accept the
terms of the license agreement.
Important
Additional H.264 licenses are required to receive H.264 video on multiple computers (P. 20). Select [Disable] for environments in which
license management cannot be performed, such as environments in which multiple unspecified users access the camera.
96
Settings for the camera name and external input/output devices, and for camera use and installation settings.
Camera Name
Set the camera name.
[Camera Name]
Enter any camera name. Be sure to enter a name in [Camera Name].
Camera Control
Set various controls for easier viewing of video.
[Digital Zoom]
Select this to enable or disable digital zoom.
If [Enable] is selected, the area indicating digital zoom will be displayed next to the zoom slider (P. 57).
Unlike optical zoom, the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.
Note
If [Enable] is selected, the area indicating digital zoom will be displayed next to the zoom slider in [Camera] > [Initial Settings] only.
[Enhanced Digital Zoom]
Select this to enable or disable the enhanced digital zoom.
When the video size is small, digital zoom can be used to enlarge it up to the maximum size resolution with reduced video
deterioration.
When [Enable] is selected, an area indicating the enhanced digital zoom and a horizontal line (blue) indicating the
enhanced digital zoom telephoto end are displayed on the zoom slider of the Viewer (P. 57).
[Camera] > [Camera]
Setting General Camera Controls
The following settings can be configured here.
Camera Name
Camera Control
Day/Night (when Auto is set)
Installation Conditions
Camera Position Control
External Input Device 1, 2
External Output Device 1, 2
HM4x
H730
S30
H730
HM4x
Setting Page
5
97
[Maximum Digital Zoom Magnification]
Sets the maximum zoom magnification for digital zoom.
[Image Stabilizer]
Select this to enable or disable blur reduction in video due to camera vibration.
If there is still blur after selecting [On1], select [On2].
The angle of view will be narrower and video noisier when using the Image Stabilizer, compared to when it is not used.
[Smart Shade Control Strength (Auto)]
Select the control strength when [Smart Shade Control] (P. 104) is set to [Auto].
[Mild]: Select if noise is noticeable.
[Medium]: Recommended setting for Auto mode (default setting)
[Strong]: Select to increase visibility in dark areas.
[Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)]
Select the strength of compensation when [Haze Compensation] (P. 105) is set to [Auto].
Note
When [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] and [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)] is set to [Strong], contrast may be strong if the
subject is not obscured by haze. If this happens, set [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)] to [Mild].
[Motion-Adaptive Noise Reduction]
When [Enable] is selected, noise reduction is automatically adjusted according to movement. For scenes in which there is
little movement, noise reduction is increased and data size decreases.
[Pan/Tilt Speed Control]
Select the pan/tilt control mode.
If [Control by zoom position] is selected, the pan/tilt speed will be slower in telephoto, and faster in wide-angle.
Day/Night (When Auto Is Set)
Set conditions for switching Day Mode and Night Mode when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto].
[Switching Brightness]
Select the brightness for switching Day/Night Mode when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto].
Select [Darker] if you want to capture video in color as much as possible.
Select [Brighter] to reduce noise. Note that this mode switches to monochrome sooner.
[Response (sec.)]
Select the number of seconds for determining when to switch Day/Night Mode, when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto]. Day/Night
Mode switches when the brightness continues to exceed or fall below the brightness set in [Switching Brightness] for the
number of seconds selected.
Select [30] or [60] if brightness changes frequently, such as when a light source passes in front of the camera. Select [5] or
[10] if change in brightness is minimal.
Important
The image stabilizer is not effective when the subject is shaking.
Stabilization is not effective beyond a certain degree of vibration or for momentary vibrations.
If you select [On2], it is recommended to select a video reception size less than [640 x 480].
If you use stabilization, please refer to the information listed in the following “Important” sections.
The “Important” section in “Setting Privacy Mask” (P. 133)
The “Important” section in “Setting View Restriction” (P. 115).
The “Important” section in “Viewing Video with the Camera Viewer” (P. 50).
The “Important” section in “Registering Presets” (P. 118).
Important
The intended effect may not be achievable, depending on the following conditions:
the size of the subject
the movement speed of the subject
the scene with a lot of noise
subjects without bright/dark contrast (white walls, etc.)
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
S30
S31
98
Installation Conditions
Configure settings for camera use suitable for the location the camera will be installed.
[Dome]
Select whether a dome is used. To use the camera with a separately sold indoor dome housing for the camera, select
[Enable].
[LED Setting]
Select whether to turn on the LED indicating the camera operation status.
If you select [Turn On], the LED will light up when turning the power on, rebooting, and during normal use.
When [Turn Off] is selected, the LED will light for several seconds during startup and then turn off.
Regardless of the setting, the LED will flash when initializing the settings.
Set to [Turn Off] if a separately sold indoor dome housing for the camera is used, or if reflected LED light enters the capture
area or otherwise interferes with image capture.
[Video Flip]
Select whether to vertically flip the video.
Select the setting suited to the camera installation method, such as ceiling mounting or placing on a desk.
Camera Position Control
Settings for camera use when there are no camera control restrictions for users or requests for camera control privileges.
[Restricted to Presets]
Restricts camera control of the camera angle, such as with Camera Viewer, to presets, including the home position, for
users other than administrators.
[Camera Position without Control]
Select the camera operation when there are no users with camera control privileges.
If [Return to Home Position] has been selected, the home position of the camera must be set in advance with [Camera] >
[Preset] > [Register Preset] (P. 118).
External Input Device
Enter each device name in order to identify the corresponding external input device being connected.
There are two external input device terminals on the camera.
[Device Name]
Enter the name of the device connected to the external input device terminal.
External Output Device
Enter each device name in order to identify the corresponding external output device being connected.
There are two external output device terminals on the camera.
[Device Name]
Enter the name of the device connected to the external output device terminal.
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
Setting Page
5
99
Sets initial settings, such as video quality compensation, at camera start up. If you change settings, the changes are
immediately reflected in the video display area and Viewer, even if you do not click [Apply].
A message confirms whether you want to display the current camera status as the initial settings if the current camera
status differs from the settings registered as the initial settings when you access [Initial Settings].
If you click [OK], the current camera status is displayed as the initial settings. If you click [Cancel], the current camera
status is ignored and the settings registered as the initial settings are displayed.
Camera Position
Sets the camera position at camera start up.
Note
After installing the camera, set the zoom position with the zoom slider in [Initial Settings]. Video cropped in the position of the zoom
slider is transmitted.
When [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] is set to [Enable] (P. 96), an area indicating digital zoom is displayed in the zoom
slider but not in the zoom slider next to the video display area of the Camera Viewer, etc.
[Pan/Tilt/Zoom position]
Register the present pan, tilt, and zoom positions as the initial setting. You can operate the frame on the panorama screen
or the video display area to perform pan, tilt, and zoom operations.
If you select [Do Not Register], the camera will return to the pan, tilt, and zoom positions as when the camera was turned off
the next time it is booted.
[Camera] > [Initial Settings]
Setting Initial Video Settings
Important
If you change the zoom after configuring the intelligent function, privacy mask, preset, and ADSR, those settings must be configured
again.
The following settings can be configured here.
Camera Position
Camera Settings
HM4x
H730 S30
H730
S80x S90x
H730
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
100
If you select [Do Not Register], the camera angle will move to the home position the next time it is booted. If you have not
specified the home position, the camera angle will move to the factory default setting. For information on specifying the
home position, please refer to P. 118.
Note
When [Digital PTZ Position] is set to [Do Not Register], you can perform pan, tilt, and zoom operations on the video display area using Area
Zoom (P. 58).
[Digital PTZ Position]
Register the current digital PTZ position as the initial setting.
If you select [Register], a yellow frame is shown in the video display area. Operate the frame to specify the Digital PTZ trim
position during startup.
Note
The Digital PTZ trim frame (yellow) displayed during startup can be set to incremental sizes. The sizes that can be set are the same as the
Digital PTZ of the Viewer (P. 65).
Camera Settings
Sets the camera settings at camera start up.
[Simple Camera Settings]
Recommended settings for [Camera Settings] are displayed according to the selected type (The table below shows the
items and their differing recommended values). You can also change the recommended settings as required and click
[Apply].
Type Motion Priority
Depth Priority
Low Light Visibility
Data Size
Reduction
Standard Settings
Usage scenario
Reduces
vibrations for
moving subjects.
Focuses within a
wide range, from
near to far.
Brightens by
raising the
sensitivity for dark
subjects.
Reduces the data
size in low-light
conditions.
Cancels the
scenario settings
and restores the
factory default
settings.
[Exposure] Auto
Auto (Aperture-
priority AE)
Auto Auto Auto
[AGC Limit]66646
[Shutter Speed
Limit (Lower)]
1/1000 (sec.)
1/250 (sec.)
1/30 (sec.) 1/8 (sec.) 1/8 (sec.) 1/30 (sec.)
[Shutter Speed
Limit (Upper)]
1/16000 (sec.) 1/16000 (sec.) 1/16000 (sec.) 1/16000 (sec.) 1/16000 (sec.)
[Smart Shade
Control]
Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
[Noise Reduction] Mild Standard Strong Strong Standard
[Sharpness]36333
[Color Saturation]44424
[Haze
Compensation]
Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
S30 S31
S80x
S90x
Setting Page
5
101
[Focus]
Selects the focus.
[Auto]
Automatically adjusts the focus.
[Manual]
You can click and hold the [Near] and [Far] buttons in [Adjust Focus] to adjust the focus in the near and far directions.
When you click [Exec] in [One-shot AF], the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch to manual mode.
The following procedure enables you to adjust the focus appropriately.
1. Select [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] in [Exposure], and move the aperture slider to the right limit to fully open the
aperture. The depth of field becomes shallow, and you can adjust the focus appropriately.
2. To adjust the focus, click and hold the [Far] or [Near] button in [Adjust Focus], or click [Exec] in [One-shot AF].
3. When you have finished adjusting the focus, change [Exposure] to an appropriate setting.
[Fixed at Infinity]
You can set the focus so that it is fixed near infinity.
Note
Focusing may be difficult for the following types of subjects when using [Auto] and [One-shot AF].
Difficult to Focus Subjects
Important
Note the following regarding [Simple Camera Settings].
[Motion Priority]
Flickering may occur due to fluorescent lighting, etc.
In low-light conditions, video may become comparatively darker than [Standard Settings], and noise may increase.
[Depth Priority]
In low-light conditions, video may become comparatively darker than [Standard Settings], and noise may increase.
[Low Light Visibility]
Residual images may appear for moving subjects in dark situations.
[Data Size Reduction]
Residual images may appear for moving subjects in dark situations.
Important
The focus you set is also applied to other users.
Depending on the lighting used, focus may not be maintained when switching between [Day Mode] and [Night Mode]. Focus when
switching between Day/Night Mode can be set in [Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus].
If you select [Manual] in [Exposure] and set the shutter speed to [1/1 sec], the camera will be out of focus if [Auto] is set. In this case,
adjust the focus with [Manual].
If you set the focus [Manual], it will remain fixed.
In conditions where an outdoor scene is captured from an indoor location through a glass window, the camera may focus on the glass
if there is dust or water on the surface. Install the camera at the shortest possible distance from the glass surface.
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730 S30
HM4x
S30
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730 S30
A white wall or other subject
lacking bright/dark contrast
A slanting
subject
A subject reflecting
strong light
A subject consisting of only
slant lines or horizontal stripes
A subject having no form,
such as flame or smoke
A subject seen
through glass
A fast moving
subject
A dark area or
night view
Subjects both
near and far
102
It is recommended that you check that the camera is focused whenever you reboot the camera.
The estimated focus ranges depending on the [Day/Night] setting are shown in the following table.
* Using infrared illumination from an external device may throw the camera out of focus.
You can use [Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus] > [Compensate for light source] to focus according to the wavelength of an infrared
light (P. 107).
[One-shot AF]
Use when [Focus] is set to [Manual]. When you click [Exec], the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch to
manual.
[Adjust Focus]
If the [Focus] is set to [Manual], you can click and hold the [Near] and [Far] buttons to adjust the focus in the near and far
directions.
[Exposure]
Selects an exposure mode.
Note
If [Auto] is selected in [Day/Night], select either [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], [Auto (Flickerless2)] ( ), [Auto
(Shutter-priority AE)] or [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] ( ) for [Exposure].
[Auto]
Automatically controls the exposure.
[Auto (Flickerless)]
Automatically adjusts the shutter speed according to the brightness of the usage environment. Video flickering caused
by fluorescent lights, etc., is reduced.
[Auto (Flickerless2)]
Use this mode if you cannot achieve the desired flickering reduction even after selecting [Auto (Flickerless)]. However,
the appropriate exposure level may not be applied (causing excessive brightness) because the range of automatic
shutter speed adjustment cannot exceed 1/100 seconds while using this mode.
[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)]
Automatically adjusts the aperture and gain according to the specified [Shutter Speed].
[Auto (Aperture-priority AE)]
Automatically adjusts the gain and shutter speed according to the specified [Aperture].
[Manual]
Manually set [Shutter Speed], [Aperture] ( ), and [Gain].
Cannot be set when [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto].
[AGC Limit]
Select the Auto Gain Control (AGC) limit value for increasing gain to brighten video in low light conditions.
The greater the value, the higher the sensitivity will become, but video noise will increase.
Focus
[Installation
Conditions]
> [Dome]
Day/Night Settings
Day Mode Night Mode
Max. Wide-Angle Max. Telephoto Max. Wide-Angle Max. Telephoto
Auto/Manual
[Disable] 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) – infinity
[Enable] 2.0 m (6.6 ft.) – infinity 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 2.2 m (7.2 ft.) – infinity
Manual 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity
Auto/Manual 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity
Fixed at Infinity Fixed near infinity*
Important
Unstable light sources may still cause flickering on the screen, even if you have selected [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Flickerless2)].
Important
[AGC Limit] will not function if [Exposure] is set to [Manual], [Auto (Flickerless)], or [Auto (Flickerless2)] ( ).
Minimum subject illumination may change when [AGC Limit] is set.
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
H730
H730
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
H730 S30
S30 S31 S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
S30 S31 S80x
S90x
S30 S31 S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
S30 S31
S80x
S90x
Setting Page
5
103
[Shutter Speed Limit (Lower)]
If [Exposure] is set to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], [Auto (Flickerless2)] ( ), or [Auto (Aperture-priority
AE)] ( ), a minimum shutter speed can be selected.
[Shutter Speed Limit (Upper)]
If [Exposure] is set to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], or [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] ( ), a maximum shutter speed
can be selected.
[Shutter Speed]
If [Exposure] is set to [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] or [Manual], you can fix the shutter speed.
Note
Slower shutter speeds generate residual images in video when capturing a moving subject.
When capturing a moving subject, selecting a higher shutter speed can reduce blurry video capture.
The table below describes the selectable range of shutter speed according to the setting for [Exposure].
* You cannot select a speed lower than [Shutter Speed Limit (Lower)].
[Aperture]
If [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] or [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set a desired aperture.
Moving the slider to the left closes the aperture and darkens the image. Moving the slider to the right opens the aperture
and brightens the image.
[Gain]
If [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set the sensitivity to affect brightness.
Moving the slider to the left darkens the video, and moving it to the right brightens video.
[Exposure Compensation]
When [Exposure] is set other than [Manual], you can adjust the brightness of the video by selecting the [Exposure
Compensation].
[Metering Mode]
When [Exposure] is set a value other than [Manual], you can selects a metering mode.
[Center-Weighted]
Performs photometry with the entire screen center-weighted.
Even if there is a slight difference in light and dark around the screen, subjects near the center will have the appropriate
exposure.
Use this when the subject is near the center of the screen.
[Average]
Performs photometry with the average of the entire screen.
[Exposure] [Shutter Speed Limit (Lower)] [Shutter Speed Limit (Upper)] [Shutter Speed]
[Auto] 1/2 – 1/16000 (sec.) 1/2 – 1/16000 (sec.)* -
[Auto (Flickerless)] 1/2 – 1/50 (sec.) 1/100 – 1/16000 (sec.) -
[Auto (Flickerless2)]
1/2 – 1/50 (sec.) - -
[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] - - 1/2 – 1/16000 (sec.)
[Auto (Aperture-priority AE)]
1/2 – 1/16000 (sec.) 1/2 – 1/16000 (sec.)* -
[Manual] - - 1/1 – 1/16000 (sec.)
Important
If a traffic signal, electronic scoreboard, etc. is captured the video may flicker. In this case, try changing [Exposure] to [Auto (Shutter-
priority AE)] and then select a shutter speed lower than 1/100 seconds so that the condition improves.
Setting a slow shutter speed may prevent the intelligent function from working correctly. Select a shutter speed that suits the capture
conditions and purpose.
Important
The setting is not available if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto].
S30
S31
S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
S30 S31 S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
104
This enables stable exposure to be obtained even in environments with large differences in light and dark on the screen.
Use this to stabilize the exposure for scenes when cars are passing or people are entering and exiting.
[Spot]
Performs photometry with the center of the screen.
This enables the appropriate exposure to be obtained for subjects in the center of the screen, regardless of differences
in light and dark around the screen.
Use this to match the exposure with the center of the screen when the subject is hit by spotlights or backlit.
[Smart Shade Control]
If the background is bright and the subject is hard to see, this function brightens dark areas without affecting bright areas to
make the subject easier to see.
This is different from Backlight Compensation (P. 62). This function suppresses over-exposure of highlights while
compensating for under-exposure in dark areas of the video.
[Manual]
Set the level of compensation in [Smart Shade Control Level].
[Auto]
Performs automatic control with both smart shade control function and exposure compensation functions to prevent
blocked up under-exposure and over-exposure.
[Smart Shade Control Level]
When [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Manual], set a compensation level.
Note
The video data size increases if you set [Auto] or [Manual] for [Smart Shade Control].
Screen noise may increase if you set [Smart Shade Control] to [Manual] and the control level to strong. Set the control level to mild to
reduce the noise.
[White Balance]
Select the white balance according to the light source to achieve natural color in the video.
[Auto]
Automatically adjusts the white balance.
[Manual]
Operate [One-shot WB], [R Gain], and [B Gain] to manually set the white balance.
[Daylight Fluorescent] (approx. 6,100K - 6,600K)
Select this when capturing under a daylight fluorescent lamp.
[White Fluorescent] (approx. 4,100K - 5,000K)
Select this when capturing under a daylight fluorescent lamp or white fluorescent lamp.
[Warm Fluorescent] (approx. 2,500K - 3,000K)
Select this when capturing under a warm fluorescent lamp.
[Mercury Lamp] (approx. 4,300K)
Select this when capturing under a mercury lamp.
Important
[Auto] cannot be selected for [Smart Shade Control] if [Exposure] is set to [Manual].
[Smart Shade Control] is not available if [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] or [Manual].
Important
When the subject has only one color, is under low light conditions, or when sodium lamps, mercury lamps or certain other fluorescent
lighting is used, [Auto] may not adjust colors appropriately.
If [Auto] is set, and the subject appears greenish under mercury lamps, select [Mercury Lamp]. If the colors of the screen are not
appropriate under a mercury lamp even when you select [Mercury Lamp], select [Manual] and use [One-shot WB].
Since the light source selection options are based on representative characteristics, appropriate colors may not be achieved
depending on the available light source. If this occurs, select [Manual] and use the [One-shot WB].
Setting Page
5
105
[Sodium Lamp] (approx. 2,000K)
Select this when capturing under an orange sodium lamp.
[Halogen Lamp] (approx. 2,700K - 3,200K)
Select this when capturing under a halogen lamp or incandescent lamp.
[One-shot WB]
If you set white balance to [Manual], this will force the white balance to match the light source and lock the setting.
Setting Method Example:
Illuminate a white subject (white paper, etc.) using the light source, making sure the subject fills the entire screen, and then
click [Exec].
[R Gain]
If you set white balance to [Manual], set the Red gain values.
[B Gain]
If you set white balance to [Manual], set the Blue gain values.
[Noise Reduction]
Select a noise reduction level. This setting is generally more effective in low-light conditions.
When set to [Strong], the noise reduction effect is increased, but residual images are more likely to appear.
When set to [Mild], the noise reduction effect is decreased and resolution is increased, but the video file size becomes
larger.
[Sharpness]
Select a sharpness level.
When set toward [Strong] the video becomes sharper, and when set toward [Mild] the video becomes softer.
When set toward [Strong] the video file size becomes larger.
[Color Saturation]
Select a color saturation level.
[Haze Compensation]
If the subject is obscured by haze, this adjusts contrast in the video to improve subject visibility.
[Manual]
Set the level of compensation in [Haze Compensation Level].
[Auto]
Automatically performs haze compensation. Select the compensation strength in [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)]
(P. 97).
Note
When [Auto] or [Manual] is selected for [Haze Compensation], the video data size may increase.
If using [Haze Compensation] causes a strong difference in video brightness, set [Haze Compensation] to [Manual] and set [Haze
Compensation Level] weaker.
[Haze Compensation Level]
When Haze Compensation is set to [Manual], set the compensation level.
[Day/Night]
Select a capture mode according to the brightness of the installation environment.
Important
When [Day/Night] is set to [Night Mode] (including when it is set to [Auto] and Night Mode is judged to be applicable), the white
balance function cannot be used.
If a subject that seldom changes is captured in a location where the light source changes gradually, such as when capturing a subject
continuously day and night, appropriate colors may not be achieved. In this case, appropriate colors can be achieved by changing the
captured video with settings such as [One-shot WB].
Important
[Haze Compensation] cannot be used if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] or [Manual].
106
[Auto]
The camera automatically determines ambient brightness and switches to Day Mode or Night Mode.
[Day Mode]
Captures normal color video.
[Night Mode]
Video turns to monochrome.
Removes the infrared filter to increase sensitivity.
Important
If you use [Auto], conduct a thorough operation test beforehand to check the effectiveness of the setting.
When [Auto] is selected, set [Exposure] to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)], [Auto (Flickerless2)] ( ), [Auto
(Shutter-priority AE)], or [Auto (Aperture-priority AE)] ( ).
If you exit the Viewer while [Day Mode] or [Night Mode] is set, these will remain in effect, even if [Day/Night] is set to [Auto] on the
Setting Page.
To enable [Auto] Day/Night Mode, set [Day/Night] to [Auto] before exiting the Viewer.
If you use [Auto], the infrared filter may move several times while the mode is switching between Day Mode and Night Mode. You will
not be able to use pan, tilt, zoom and manual focus during this period.
If you use infrared illumination from an external device in Night Mode, turn on the infrared illumination before switching to Night Mode.
The camera is equipped with an infrared filter, but infrared illumination is not possible because the camera does not have a feature to
remove the filter.
HM4x
H730
S30
S31 S80x S90x
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
S30
S31 S80x S90x
Setting Page
5
107
Set the focus position when switching day/night. It is necessary to change the focus position since the wavelengths of
regular lighting such as fluorescent lamps and infrared lighting differ.
Note
You can set [Day/Night Mode Focus] when [Focus] (P. 101) is set to [Manual].
Day/Night Mode Focus
[Day/Night Mode Focus Control]
Set the focus control method when switching day/night.
[Use One-shot AF]
Select this to use One-shot AF when switching Day/Night Mode.
[Move to registered focus position]
When switching Day/Night Mode, the focus positions preregistered in [Day Mode Focus Position] or [Night Mode Focus
Position] will be used. For more information, please refer to “Registering a Focus Position”.
[None]
When switching Day/Night Mode, the camera automatically focuses on each of the fluorescent lighting focus positions
set beforehand for Day Mode and Night Mode.
[Compensate for light source]
Adjust the focus position to suit the light source when switching to Night Mode.
[Light Source]
If you selected [Compensate for light source], select the light source.
[Camera] > [Day/Night Mode Focus]
Day/Night Mode Focus
Important
Even if you use [Day/Night Mode Focus] with the night mode, the camera may be out of focus due to changes in the light source (when
sunlight mixes with infrared lighting, etc.).
Important
When using [Use One-shot AF] and switching between Day/Night Mode, it may not be possible to focus on the intended subject if
another subject, such as a person, passes in front of the camera.
HM4x
H730
The following settings can be configured here.
Day/Night Mode Focus
Camera Control
HM4x
H730
H730
108
[Fluorescent]
Select this option to capture video under fluorescent, LED, sodium or mercury lighting.
[Halogen Lamp]
Select this option to capture video under halogen or incandescent lighting.
[Infrared Light (740nm)]
Select this option to capture video under infrared (740 nm wavelength) illumination.
[Infrared Light (850nm)]
Select this option to capture video under infrared (850 nm wavelength) illumination.
[Infrared Light (940nm)]
Select this option to capture video under infrared (940 nm wavelength) illumination.
Registering a Focus Position
If you selected [Move to registered focus position] for [Day/Night Mode Focus Control], register a focus position.
[Registered] is displayed for [Day Mode Focus Position].
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
If you select an item other than [Move to registered focus position] without first clicking [Apply], the focus position returns to
[Unregistered].
Click [Clear] to set the focus position again. The focus position setting is discarded and the setting saved in the camera is
restored.
See the page (P. 102) for the focus ranges when using Day/Night Mode settings.
Camera Control
Set the camera focus adjustment and day/night capture mode when controlling day/night mode focus.
[One-shot AF]
Use when [Move to registered focus position] is selected in [Day/Night Mode Focus Control]. When you click [Exec], it will
focus once using autofocus and then switch to manual mode.
[Adjust Focus]
Use when [Move to registered focus position] is selected in [Day/Night Mode Focus Control]. Click [Far] and [Near] to
adjust focus.
[Day/Night]
Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment.
[Auto]
The camera automatically determines ambient brightness and switches to Day Mode or Night Mode.
[Day Mode]
Captures normal color video.
1
In [Camera Control], select [Day Mode] for [Day/Night].
2
Use [One-shot AF] or [Adjust Focus] in [Camera Control] while viewing the video display area to adjust the camera
to a suitable focus position under the lighting conditions of day mode.
3
Click [Register] for [Day Mode Focus Position].
4
In [Camera Control], change [Day/Night] to [Night Mode].
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register the focus position under the Night Mode lighting conditions.
6
Click [Apply].
Setting Page
5
109
[Night Mode]
Video turns to monochrome.
Removes the infrared filter to increase sensitivity.
HM4x
H730
110
You can create a panorama image that captures the entire area that can be captured by the camera.
Created panorama images are displayed in the Viewer and part of the Setting Page.
Creating a Panorama Image
A panorama image can be used in the Viewer and for a privacy mask by clicking [Apply] to save it to the camera after
capturing.
Note
While a panorama image is being captured, the Image Stabilizer is temporarily disabled.
The following users will be disconnected while creating a panorama image.
All users except for administrators
Users not connected via RTP
When a small value is entered for [Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission] (P. 92) in [Video] > [JPEG], panorama capture is slowed
down.
Set the range for panorama creation. This enables the panorama creation time to be reduced.
[Specify the panorama creation area]
If you select [Specified], the panorama image is created within a set area that can be captured by the camera. If
you select [Not Specified], the panorama image is created within the entire area that can be captured by the
camera.
If you selected [Not Specified], proceed to step 3.
[Camera] > [Panorama]
Creating a Panorama Image
Important
If you change the privacy mask settings in [Privacy Mask], it is recommended that you create the panorama image again to reflect the
new privacy mask settings in the panorama image.
If you have changed the camera installation method settings, recapture the panorama image.
HM4x
S30
S31
The following settings can be configured here.
Panorama Creation Area
Panorama Image
Capture Settings
HM4x
1
Set [Panorama Creation Area].
Setting Page
5
111
Operate the camera angle to get the positioning value in the video display area, and specify the panorama
creation range.
[Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit]
Operate the camera angle to the upper limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit to set in the video display area.
Click [Get value] in each position to reflect the values to the panorama creation range frame.
Click [Preview] in [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit] to move the preview frame to the upper
limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit of the current panorama creation range frame and display it in the video
display area.
Two types of frames are displayed for panorama images.
(1) Panorama creation area frame (red frame)
Indicates the capture area of the panorama image. You can also drag the panorama creation area frame to
set the capture range for the panorama image.
Note
If the preview frame is positioned outside the panorama creation area frame you have changed, the camera position is
moved inside the panorama creation area frame.
(2) Preview frame (blue frame)
Indicates the current position shown in the video display area.
For details on the settings, please refer to “Capture Settings” (P. 113).
[Capture Settings] are applied when panorama capture is started, and the previous settings are restored after
panorama capture is complete.
2
Set the panorama creation area using the video display area.
3
Set [Capture Settings] as necessary.
4
In [Start], click [Exec].
(2)
(1)
112
Capturing starts, and the panorama image is created.
Click [Cancel] to cancel capturing.
To recapture part of the image:
A lattice frame is displayed on the created panorama image.
Right-click with the mouse pointer over the area to recapture and select [Recapture] to recapture that area only.
To capture the entire panorama image again:
Click [Exec] of [Start] again.
The created image is not yet saved in the camera.
The panorama image is saved in the camera and reflected in the other settings.
Deleting a Panorama Image from the Camera
You can delete a panorama image saved in the camera.
The displayed panorama image is cleared.
The confirmation message is displayed.
The panorama image saved in the camera is deleted.
Saving the Panorama Image as an Image File/Opening the Image File
The captured panorama image can be saved as an image file and image files can be opened as panorama images.
Only image files in the JPEG format can be used.
Saving the Panorama Image as an Image File
5
In [Finish], click [Exec].
6
Click [Apply].
1
Click [Exec] of [Delete].
2
Click [Apply].
3
Click [OK].
1
After creating the panorama image, click [Exec] in [Save to file].
2
In the displayed dialog box, select the folder to save the file in, and enter the file name.
3
Click [Save].
Setting Page
5
113
The image file is saved in the specified location.
Opening the Image File
The panorama image is displayed.
Capture Settings
These settings will be applied at the panorama image capture start time and will revert back to their previous settings once
capture is completed.
[Exposure Lock]
The exposure for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked during capture.
[White Balance Lock]
The white balance for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked during capture.
[Focus Lock]
The focus for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked for the entire scene during capture.
1
In [Load from file], click [Exec].
2
In the displayed dialog box, select the image file to use and click [Open].
HM4x
S30
114
Set the range that the camera can capture.
You can use this, for example, to limit zoom or the angle of view to a certain range when publishing live video.
Scope of View Restriction Settings
Restrictions set by the view restriction function are applied in the following cases.
When the Camera Viewer is accessed with authorized user or guest user privileges.
When accessed via RM-Lite.
For presets or functions that move to preset positions.
Note
Even when view restrictions are set, an area outside the view restriction may still be displayed momentarily when the camera is
controlled near the boundary of the view restriction.
[Camera] > [View restriction]
Setting View Restriction
HM4x
S30
S31
The following settings can be configured here.
View restriction
View restriction
Recording outside the view restriction
is not possible.
Setting Page
5
115
Configuring View Restrictions
Set a restrict view area and click [Apply] to restrict the capture range of the Camera Viewer.
Note
To delete view restriction settings, select [Disable], and click [Apply].
Operate the camera angle using the frame on the video display area or the panorama screen/full-view screen to
get the positioning value, and specify the restrict view area.
[Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit]
Operate the camera angle to the upper limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit to set in the video display area.
Click [Get value] in each position to reflect the values to the pan/tilt preview frame.
Click [Preview] in [Upper Limit]/[Lower Limit]/[Left Limit]/[Right Limit] to move the preview frame to the upper
limit, lower limit, left limit, and right limit of the current pan/tilt preview frame, respectively, and display it in the
video display area.
[Telephoto]/[Wide-angle]
Operate the camera angle to the wide-angle/telephoto limit to set, using the frame on the video display area or
the panorama screen.
Click [Get value] in each position to reflect the values to the wide-angle preview frame/telephoto preview frame.
Click [Preview] in [Telephoto]/[Wide-angle] to move the preview frame to the telephoto/wide-angle limit of the
current wide-angle preview frame/telephoto preview frame and display it in the video display area.
You can also set the telephoto/wide-angle limit range by directly moving the operation knob on the zoom slider up
and down. This also moves each preview frame to the telephoto/wide-angle limit of the current wide-angle
preview frame/telephoto preview frame and displays it in the video display area.
If you dragged the telephoto knob to the upper limit and the wide-angle knob to the lower limit, the view restriction
is disabled for each edge (there is no restriction).
Important
If you have changed how the camera is installed, reconfigure the view restriction settings.
Check view restrictions again if you change the [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings on the Setting Page.
When [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] or [Image Stabilizer] ( ) is changed on the Setting Page, check
the view restriction settings again.
HM4x
1
Select [Enable] in [View Restrictions].
2
Set the restrict view area using the frame on the video display area or the panorama screen/full-view screen.
116
Drag the frames displayed on the panorama screen to set the restrict view area.
(1) Pan/Tilt Preview Frame (Red Frame)
Displays the vertical and horizontal range the camera can move. You can directly change the restrict view
area by dragging the pan/tilt preview frame.
If you dragged the pan/tilt preview frame to the outer frame of the panorama area, the view restriction is
disabled for each edge (there is no restriction).
(2) Wide-Angle Preview Frame (Green Frame)
You can directly change the maximum wide-angle view by dragging the wide-angle preview frame, but the
aspect ratio cannot be changed.
The wide-angle preview frame can be set within the pan/tilt preview frame.
(3) Telephoto Preview Frame (Yellow Frame)
You can directly change the maximum telephoto view by dragging the telephoto preview frame, but the
aspect ratio cannot be changed.
The telephoto preview frame can be set within the wide-angle preview frame.
(4) Preview Frame (Blue Frame)
Indicates the current position shown in the video display area.
Note
If the preview frame (blue frame) is positioned outside the pan/tilt preview frame (red frame) you have changed, the
camera position is moved inside the restricted view.
If you change the position of the wide-angle/telephoto preview frame, the wide-angle/telephoto end of the preview
frame is also changed.
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
The controllable range and range that can be captured are as follows.
3
Click [Apply].
Important
The panorama screen may vary from the actual image. After you have configured view restrictions, be sure to use the Camera
Viewer to confirm the changes have been reflected correctly. View restrictions are not applied to the video display area of the
restrict view setting.
View Restriction Operation Knob (Telephoto)
View Restriction Operation Knob (Wide-angle)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Setting Page
5
117
The pan and tilt ranges vary depending on the zoom ratio (view angle).
If the view restriction will be exceeded as a result of zooming toward wide-angle, the camera will first pan and tilt to a position
where the maximum wide-angle zoom will be within the viewing restriction area. Wide-angle zoom control will then be enabled
within the view restriction area.
Narrowing the view restriction may also reduce the zoom range.
Tilt Control Range
Pan Control Range
Maximum Horizontal Capture Range
Maximum Wide-angle Viewing Angle
Maximum Vertical Capture Range
Setting view restrictions
automatically restricts
the camera operating
angle.
When using wide-angle, the camera
operating angle would allow capture outside
the view restrictions if the angle remained the
same. Therefore, it is narrowed automatically.
Restricted view angle
Camera operating angle
Captured video range
Camera
Zoom
out
Captured video
Restricted view angle
Zoom
out
First, the center of the
maximum wide-angle
zoom is panned and
tilted.
After panning and
tilting, wide-angle
zoom control is
enabled within the
view restriction.
118
By registering settings as presets, such as camera angles and camera settings (e.g. exposure), the presets can be easily
called up by Viewers to apply the settings.
Using Presets
In addition to immediate execution of registered camera angles and the camera settings such as exposure when
operating the viewer, you can use presets as follows.
Execute the presets during switches between Day Mode and Night Mode (P. 180).
Automatically cycle through multiple presets at a set time and in a predetermined sequence (Preset Tour) (P. 121).
When using the Intelligent Function, lock the monitoring position at a preset camera angle (P. 161).
Registering a Preset
The camera angle and camera settings can be registered as a preset.
The number of presets you can register are as follows.
Maximum 65 presets (including the home position)
[Camera] > [Preset]
Registering Presets
Important
It is strongly recommended you register as presets, the positions Intelligent Function will use for the camera.
If you use a preset registered with the digital zoom, the camera position at registration may not be able to be reproduced with a high
degree of accuracy. Therefore, it is recommended that you use a preset registered in the optical zoom area for the preset tour (
only) and intelligent function.
Reconfigure the presets if you change the [Camera] > [Camera] > [Installation Conditions] > [Video Flip] (P. 98) settings on the Setting
Page.
Reconfigure the presets if you change [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] (P. 91) settings on the Setting Page.
If you change the settings in [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer] on the Setting Page (P. 97), the angle of view when
using the camera will not match the angle of view when you configured presets. If you change [Image Stabilizer] settings, recheck the
preset settings.
If a separately sold indoor dome housing for the camera is used, be sure to set presets with the dome installed.
The following settings can be configured here.
Camera Settings
Register Preset
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
HM4x
S30
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
H730 S80x
S90x
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
Setting Page
5
119
Maximum 21 presets (including the home position)
The camera angle can also be operated from the following screens.
Set the items to apply in the preset. For a description of each item, please refer to “Camera Settings” (P. 100).
[Pan/Tilt/Zoom position] /[Digital PTZ Position]
Select [Register] to register the current camera angle as a preset.
Note
If you selected [Home] (home position) in the preset list, [Pan/Tilt/Zoom position]/[Digital PTZ Position] is always registered.
[Camera Settings]
Select [Register] to register the current camera settings as a preset.
H730
S80x
S90x
1
Operate the panorama image to set the angle you want to register as the preset.
2
Click [Camera Settings] to set the items as necessary.
3
Set the items of preset registration.
HM4x
S30
S31
Video Display Area Panorama Screen
Preview Frame
H730
S80x
S90x
Video Display Area Full-View Screen
Preview Frame
HM4x
S30
S31
H730
S80x S90x
120
[Preset Name]
Enter a preset name. Be sure to enter a preset name in [Preset Name].
[Show in Viewers]
Select [Enable] to allow the Camera Viewers to use the preset.
Note
If the preset position is outside the restrict view area, (a warning icon) is displayed on the left.
The preset is saved in the camera.
Note
Click [Clear] to discard the settings and restore the settings saved in the camera. However, note that presets only registered to the
preset list by clicking [Add] are all discarded.
Deleting a Preset
Select the preset to delete in the preset list, and click [Delete]. Click [Apply] to delete the preset from the camera.
[Home] (home position) cannot be deleted.
Previewing a Preset
Select a preset in the preset list, and click [Preview]. The preset settings are shown in the video display area.
Checking Advanced Preset Information
Displays the information of the presets registered in the camera.
Select the preset to check the advanced information from the preset list, and click [Show Detailed Information].
Check the detailed information, and click [OK].
4
Click [Add].
5
To register multiple presets, repeat steps 1 – 4.
6
Click [Apply].
HM4x
S30 S31
Setting Page
5
121
You can have the camera automatically tour multiple registered presets to allow monitoring.
Note
Preset tour is not performed while the camera control privileges are obtained in the Camera Viewer or the video is displayed on the
Setting Page.
Preset tour is not performed when control privileges are obtained by RM-Lite.
Screen Composition
The screen composition differs according to the camera model, because the number of tour routes that can be registered,
number of presets that can be toured with a single route, and tour conditions differ.
[Camera] > [Preset Tour]
Setting the Preset Tour Route
Important
Intelligent Function cannot be used while using preset tour.
HM4x
H730
S80x
S90x
The following settings can be configured here.
Route List
Edit Tour Route
HM4x
122
(1) [Route List]
The list of preset tour routes. Displays the tour conditions that are set. Up to five tour routes can be set.
(2) Tour Condition Settings
Set the conditions for touring (P. 123).
(3) [Edit Tour Route]
Displays a list of the presets to tour. The presets are toured from the top of the list.
You can change the order of the presets and set the time to stop at the preset positions, etc.
(4) Video Display Area
Displays the current camera video.
(5) Panorama Screen
Displays the panorama images registered in the camera.
HM4x
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(1)
H730 S80x
S90x
(2)
(4)
(6)
(3)
HM4x
HM4x
Setting Page
5
123
(a) Pan/Tilt Preview Frame (Red Frame)
Displays the vertical and horizontal range the camera can move. Displayed when the restricted view is set
(P. 114).
(b) Preview Frame (Blue Frame)
Indicates the current trim position in the video display area.
(c) Preset Preview Frame (White Frame)
Indicates the preset/home position that is currently selected.
(6) Digital PTZ Panel
Displays the full video obtained by the camera when starting [Preset Tour].
(b) Preview Frame (Blue Frame)
Indicates the current camera angle in the video display area
(c) Preset Preview Frame (White Frame)
Indicates the preset/home position that is currently selected.
Tour Route Settings
The number of tour routes you can register and the number of presets that can be toured per route are as follows.
Maximum 5 routes, maximum 64 presets per route
Maximum 1 route, maximum 20 presets per route
Note
If the effective conditions or active times of the registered tour routes conflict, the routes listed higher in the [Route List] take precedence.
[Conditions to Enable Settings]
Select the conditions to perform a preset tour.
[Disable]
Preset tour is not performed.
[Viewers Connected]
Preset tour is performed when a Viewer is connected to the camera.
(a)
(b)
(c)
H730 S80x S90x
(b)
(c)
HM4x
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
1
Select the tour route to configure from [Route List].
2
Specify the settings for tour route name and usage.
HM4x
124
[Always]
Preset tour is always performed.
Note
When [Disable] is selected, the following preset tour route settings cannot be configured.
[Route Name]
Enter the tour route name.
[Specify Active Time]
Select [Specified] to configure a preset tour at a predetermined time, and enter the start time and end time for the
preset tour.
If [Viewers Connected] is set for [Conditions to Enable Settings], the preset tour operates when the Viewer is
connected to the camera at the tour start time. If [Always] is set for [Conditions to Enable Settings], the preset tour
always operates.
[Reverse Route]
If you select [Enable], the preset tour order in [Edit Tour Route] will be reversed.
You can select multiple presets.
Note
If the preset position is outside the restrict view area, (a warning icon) is displayed on the left.
The preset is added to the [Edit Tour Route].
Select a preset in [Edit Tour Route] and click the [ ] or [ ] to change its position in the list.
If you select a preset in [Edit Tour Route] and then click [Delete], the preset will be deleted.
Select a preset name in the [Preset List] or [Edit Tour Route] list, and click [Preview]. The preset settings can be
checked in the video display area.
3
Click [Add] in [Edit Tour Route].
4
Select a preset to tour from the [Preset List].
HM4x
HM4x
5
Click [Add].
HM4x
Setting Page
5
125
Note
If a preset has already been added to [Edit Tour Route] when another preset is added from [Preset List], the added preset will be
displayed below the preset selected in [Edit Tour Route].
Select the preset to configure in [Edit Tour Route] and set the tour operation.
[Speed (PT)]
Select the camera pan/tilt speed for moving to the next preset.
[Speed (Z)]
Select the camera zoom speed for moving to the next preset.
[Pause (sec)]
Enter the time the camera pauses at the preset position.
Note
If you want to view video during moves between presets, select a slow speed. If you only want to switch quickly to view video at the
preset positions, select a fast speed.
Click [Apply] after configuring the route. The setting will be saved to the camera.
Note
Click [Clear] to set the route again. The settings saved in the camera are restored. However, note that presets only added to the
[Edit Tour Route] by clicking [Add] are all discarded.
6
Configure the preset speed and pause duration.
7
Click [Apply].
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
126
Reduces the size of transmitted H.264 video by reducing the video quality of non-target areas, such as ceilings and the sky.
ADSR is an abbreviation for Area-specific Data Size Reduction.
Note
The image quality of the specified area depends on the [Bit Rate Control] setting in [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)].
When [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)] is set: The image quality is adjusted according to the situation to match the target bit
rate.
When [Do not use bit rate control (variable bit rate)] is set: The setting in [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] is retained.
The image quality for areas outside the specified area will be reduced according to [Data Size Reduction Level].
Even if the camera pans, tilts, or zooms (zoom is for only), the specified area follows the movement of the camera.
Specified areas can only be configured within view restrictions.
Specified Area
Specify the area where video quality is not to be lowered.
You can specify up to eight areas with different colored frames.
[Video and Audio] > [ADSR]
Reducing Data Size by Lowering Video Quality in Specific
Areas
Important
Some image scenes and settings for selected areas may not be able to reduce data size using ADSR. Please test the ADSR feature in the
environment before use.
The following settings can be configured here.
Specified Area
•ADSR
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
Setting Page
5
127
The frame for the specified area is displayed on the video display area.
Set the specified area as follows within the display area.
Drag out a frame and move it to the area you want to specify.
Change the size of the frame by dragging any of the eight handles ().
To change the camera angle, perform either of below
Control using the pan/tilt/zoom sliders
Select a preset in the preset selection box
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
You can use the Camera Viewer to check video with ADSR settings applied. Video outside the specified area will deteriorate
according to the amount of applied data reduction.
[Preview]
The camera will move to a specified area if you click [Preview] for that area.
Note
If you change the camera angle before operating the area frame, the area frame may become hidden. To display the area frame again,
either click the [Preview] for the target specified area, or use the slider to move the camera angle to a position in which the entire area
frame is displayed.
ADSR
Set the data size reduction of outside areas set with [Specified Area].
Important
If you change the [Video Flip] setting in [Camera] > [Installation Conditions], review the specified area settings.
Reconfigure the specified area if you change the [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings.
Configure the specified area to a slightly larger size.
Specified areas may deviate slightly from the specified position depending on the zoom position.
The selected area can only be set within the optical zoom range, and cannot be set using the digital zoom range (P. 57).
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
HM4x
S30
1
Select [Enable] for the area with the frame color to use for the specified area.
2
Set the specified area.
3
Click [Apply].
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
128
[Enable in H.264(1)]
Select [Enable] to lower video quality of outside areas set with [Specified Area] in H.264(1) video.
[Enable in H.264(2)]
Select [Enable] to lower video quality of outside areas set with [Specified Area] in H.264(2) video.
[Data Size Reduction Level]
Set the data size reduction level for the outside area of [Specified Area]. If you select [Low], the data size reduction effect is
lower. If you select [High], the data size reduction effect is higher.
Setting Page
5
129
Displays the date and time, camera name and other text on the Video.
Note
Depending on video quality settings, the on-screen display may become difficult to decipher. Set it after confirming appearance on
actual video.
When using digital PTZ, on-screen display will not be shown if the cropped video has a horizontal size of 384 pixels or less.
Setting the [Text display], [Date display], and [Time display] to the same position may result in not displaying all of the information. In
such case, items set with [Upper right] or [Lower right] for [Position of text display] are prioritized for display.
All of the texts may not be displayed depending on the video size, text length, and text position. Check the display after changing the
video size and on-screen display settings.
Date display
[Date display]
Select whether to display the date on the Video.
[Position of date display]
Select position for date display on the Video.
[Format of date display]
Select the year, month and day display order.
Time display
[Time display]
Select whether to display the time on the Video.
[Position of time display]
Select position for time display on the Video.
[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]
Displaying Date, Time and Text on the Video
Important
The on-screen time display is not suitable for usage where high reliability is required. Only use it as reference information on systems
where utmost and constant reliability is required for surveillance.
The following settings can be configured here.
Date display
•Time display
Text display
Common Settings
130
Text display
[Text display]
Select the text strings to display on the Video.
[Display designated string]
Displays the text string entered in [Text string display] below.
[Display camera name]
Displays the camera name entered in [Camera Name] (P. 96).
[Position of text display]
Select position for text display on the Video.
[Text string display]
If [Text display] is set to [Display designated string], enter the text string to be displayed in alphanumeric characters.
Common Settings
[Color of text]
Select from eight colors for the text color.
[Background color]
Select from eight colors for the background color.
[Color depth of text and background]
Select a color depth combination (Filling, Transparence, Translucence) for the text and background color.
Setting Page
5
131
Mask any areas of the camera video. You can check the camera video and set up to eight privacy masks.
When the camera is panned, tilted, or zoomed, the privacy mask areas follow the camera video.
Registering Privacy Masks
Use the mouse to position and size the privacy mask areas, then save the settings to the camera.
Use the sliders or a preset in the preset selection menu to operate the camera angle.
You can perform the following operations while the mouse operation switch button is purple after clicking it.
Centering the camera angle to the position you click in the video display area
Area zoom operations (P. 58)
Note
The preview frame is not shown on the video display area while the mouse operation switch button is purple.
[Video and Audio] > [Privacy Mask]
Setting Privacy Mask
Important
Privacy masks are applied to all video transmitted from the camera (live video, uploaded video, recorded video and video recorded to
a memory card).
Privacy masks are not available in the following situations.
When the camera is launched immediately after being turned on.
While a panorama image is being created.
Intelligent Function detection also works in the privacy mask areas. The [Intelligence Function] Setting Page displays the profile line of
detected objects, etc., so you may be able to tell the movement of subjects even if a mask is applied.
HM4x
S30 S31
The following settings can be configured here.
•Privacy Mask
Mask area
All privacy masks
HM4x
S30 S31
1
Display the area which you want to add as a mask area on the video display area.
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
132
The preview frame attached with the area number is shown on the video display area. The privacy mask area for
the corresponding number is also displayed on the privacy mask registration area.
Drag the preview frame shown in the video display area to the position you want to mask.
Change the size of the preview frame by dragging the handles () positioned on its four sides.
The settings for the privacy mask area is enabled.
Set [Mask area] to [Disable] to temporarily disable a privacy mask area without deleting it. The disabled privacy
mask area of the registration area will be displayed with a crossed out frame.
The color selected here is reflected to all the preview frames and privacy mask areas.
You can save up to eight privacy masks.
2
In [Add mask area], click [Add].
3
Set the size and position for the preview frame in the video display area.
Important
Set the privacy mask area to a slightly larger size than the area you want to hide.
4
Set [Mask area] to [Enable].
5
Change the color for the privacy mask area with [Color] as necessary.
6
To add privacy mask areas, repeat steps 1 to 5.
HM4x
S30 S31
Preview Frame
Privacy Mask Registration Area
Area Number
Privacy Mask Area
HM4x
S30
S31
Setting Page
5
133
The privacy mask area is saved to the camera.
Saved privacy mask areas are shown in the video display area and the privacy mask registration area.
Changing/Deleting a Privacy Mask
Privacy Mask Registration Area
This shows the positions of privacy mask areas in the entire area that can be captured by the camera.
(1) Entire Area That Camera Can Capture
This shows the area that can physically be captured.
If a panorama image is registered in the camera, the panorama image is displayed here.
(2) View Restriction Area
Appears in gray if view restrictions have been configured (P. 114).
(3) Privacy Mask Areas
Privacy mask areas with [Mask area] set to [Enable] (P. 132) are filled in.
Privacy mask areas with [Mask area] set to [Disable] (P. 132) have diagonal lines displayed in them.
(4) Preview Frame
Indicates the current position of the camera shown in the video display area.
Changing Mask Position and Size
How to Select a Privacy Mask
The following methods are available for selecting the privacy mask area.
Click the privacy mask area you want to change in the privacy mask registration area.
Click [Preview] in the mask area you want to display.
Click the privacy mark area shown in the video display area.
7
Click [Apply].
Important
Check privacy mask settings again if you change the [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings.
You will need to set the position of the privacy mask again if you change the [Video Flip] setting in [Camera] > [Camera] >
[Installation Conditions].
If you reconfigure privacy mask settings after you changed the [Camera] > [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer],
reconfigure all privacy mask positions and sizes.
If you change the privacy mask settings after saving a panorama image using the panorama function, you must use the
panorama function to recreate the panorama image (P. 110).
After registering a privacy mask, pan, tilt and zoom the camera to confirm the areas you want to mask do not become visible
when the camera angle is altered.
Privacy masks may deviate slightly from the specified position depending on the zoom position.
HM4x
HM4x
S30 S31
(1)(1)
HM4x
S30
S31
H730
S80x
S90x
(4)
(3)
(2)
(3)
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
134
Move the preview frame by dragging it and change its size by dragging the handles () positioned on its four
sides.
Note
To discard changes and restore settings saved to the camera, click [Clear]. However, note that mask area settings that have not
been saved in the camera by clicking [Apply] are all discarded.
The changed privacy mask area is saved to the camera.
Deleting a Privacy Mask from the Camera
Click [Delete] for [Mask area] in the privacy mask that you want to delete, then click [Apply].
The selected privacy mask area is deleted from the camera.
1
Select the privacy mask area you want to change.
2
Change the position and size of the privacy mask area.
3
Click [Apply].
Setting Page
5
135
Settings for audio input from the microphone connected to the camera and audio output from the Viewer. The output sound
clip used when an event is triggered can also be registered.
[Audio Server] is the same as [Server] > [Audio Server]. Settings configured on one [Audio Server] page are also reflected
on the other.
General Audio
Set the audio input/output volume and microphone type.
[Audio Input]
Select whether to use audio input from the microphone. If you select [Enable], you can use functions related to audio input
such as [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] (P. 136) or [Event] > [Audio Detection] > [Volume
Detection Event] (P. 152).
If you select [Disable] and click [Apply], the following settings are locked and audio input functions are disabled.
[Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] > [Disable]
[Server] > [RTP Server] > [RTP Stream 1] – [RTP Stream 5] > [Audio Transmission] > [Disable]
[Event] > [Audio Detection] > [Volume Detection] > [Volume Detection Event] > [Disable]
[Event] > [Audio Detection] > [Scream Detection] > [Scream Detection Event] > [Disable]
[Video and Audio] > [Audio]
Setting Audio Input/Output
Important
Video and audio can be distributed to up to 30 clients. However, when there are many clients or they are connected to the camera over
an SSL/TLS connection, the video frame rate may slow down and the sound may drop out if audio reception from the camera is
enabled.
The video and audio may not be synchronized.
If the [Input Volume] or [Echo Canceller] ( only) setting is changed after setting volume detection (P. 152) or scream detection
(P. 153), check the detection setting again.
The audio may be temporarily interrupted, depending on the performance of the computer and the network environment.
The audio may be interrupted if anti-virus software is enabled.
Communication may be temporarily interrupted, cutting off the audio, if the LAN cable is unplugged and plugged in again. If this
occurs, reconnect from the Viewer.
The volume, sound quality, etc., may change depending on the characteristics of the microphone used.
Use a speaker with an amplifier to connect to the camera (please refer to “Installation Guide”).
The following settings can be configured here.
General Audio
•Audio Server
Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3
H730
HM4x
H730
136
[Input Volume]
Set the input volume from the microphone connected to the camera when [Audio Input] is set to [Enable].
This is applied when [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] (P. 136) is set to [Enable].
[Current Volume Level]
When [Audio Input] is set to [Enable], the current volume level is displayed on the status bar.
[Output Volume]
Enter the output volume from the Viewer to the speaker connected to the camera.
This is applied when [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] (P. 137) is set to [Enable].
[Echo Canceller]
Select to enable or disable the Echo Canceller for suppressing echoes that occur between the microphone and speaker.
This is applied when [Audio Server] (P. 136) is set to the following.
[Audio Transmission from the Camera] is set to [Enable]
[Audio Reception from Viewer] is set to [Enable]
[Audio Input Mode]
Select the type of microphone connected to the camera.
[Audio Communication Method]
Select the audio transmission/reception method.
[Half Duplex]
You can prevent howling that occurs when the microphone and speaker are placed nearby. However, there is no sound
sent from the camera to the viewer while the camera is receiving audio from the viewer or while an audio file is being
played back.
[Full Duplex]
Audio can be transmitted from the camera to the viewer even while the camera is receiving audio from the viewer.
Audio Server
Set audio transmission from the microphone, and audio reception from the Viewer to the camera.
[Audio Transmission from the Camera]
Select [Enable] to transmit audio from the microphone connected to the camera to the Viewer.
[Enable] cannot be selected if [General Audio] > [Audio Input] is set to [Disable].
[Voice Activity Detection]
Select whether to detect when there is no sound coming from the microphone.
Important
Use of the Echo Canceller may affect audio quality and volume. Use it when necessary to suit the installation environment and camera
usage.
Caution
If using a microphone, switch [Line In] and [Microphone In] with [Audio Input Mode] to suit the specifications of the
microphone.
Using the wrong input may damage the camera and/or microphone. Be sure to configure settings correctly.
HM4x
H730
H730
H730
HM4x
H730
Network
Setting Page
5
137
When set to [Enable], audio data transmission will pause while there is no sound input from the camera. This can reduce the
load on the network used.
[Audio Reception from Viewer]
Select to receive audio from Camera Viewer and RM Viewer.
Received audio can be output from a speaker with an amplifier connected to the camera.
Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3
You can upload up to three sound clips for playback when an event is triggered.
Note
The sound clip is used when audio playback is set in [Event] > [External Device Input] (P. 150) or [Event] > [Intelligent Function] > the
[Event] tab (P. 178).
[Browse File]
Specify the sound clip to upload and click [Add].
To be able to upload a sound clip, it must satisfy the following requirements.
Playback length: Less than 20 seconds
File Format: “.wav” (µ-law PCM 8bit. Sampling frequency 8000 Hz, monaural)
If it is blank when you click [Apply], the sound clip registered in the camera will be deleted.
To delete an uploaded sound clip, click [Delete] next to the name of the sound clip.
[Sound Clip Name]
Enter the name of the sound clip to upload.
Be sure to enter the sound clip name.
HM4x
H730
Network
HM4x
H730
138
Settings for HTTP server, SNMP server, FTP server usage or WS-Security time checks.
HTTP Server
Set the authentication method and HTTP port number.
[Authentication Method]
Select an authentication method for use by the HTTP server.
[HTTP Port]
Enter an HTTP port number.
Normally use [80] (factory default setting).
[HTTPS Port]
Enter an HTTPS port number.
Normally use [443] (factory default setting).
SNMP Server
Configure the necessary settings to use SNMP.
Note
The camera information referenced from the SNMP manager is read-only.
Use an SNMP Manager that supports SNMP MIB2 (supporting RFC1213).
[Use SNMP v1 and v2c]
If you select [Enable], you can use SNMP v1 and v2c to browse the camera information from an SNMP manager.
[Server] > [Server]
HTTP, SNMP and FTP Server Settings
Important
If the setting of [HTTP Port] or [HTTPS Port] is changed and the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser, a
confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click [OK] to apply the new setting.
If you reboot the camera and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for connecting to the camera will be
displayed in a message.
If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your system administrator.
The following settings can be configured here.
HTTP Server
SNMP Server
SNMP v1 and v2c Server
SNMP v3 Server
FTP Server
WS-Security
Setting Page
5
139
[Use SNMP v3]
If you select [Enable], you can use SNMP v3 to browse the camera information from an SNMP manager.
[Administrator Contact Information]
Enter contact information (e-mail address, etc.) for the administrator of the camera. Setting information can be referenced
by the SNMP manager.
[Administration Function Name]
Enter the camera name used for administration. Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP manager.
If left blank, the camera model name will be used.
[Installation Location]
Enter information regarding the installation location of this camera. Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP
manager.
SNMP v1 and v2c Server
[Community Name]
If you select [Enable] for [Use SNMP v1 and v2c], enter the community name to use for SNMPv1 and v2c. The factory
default setting is blank.
SNMP v3 Server
[User Name]
If you selected [Enable] for [Use SNMP v3], set the user name to use with SNMP v3.
[Security Level]
Select the security level to use for SNMP v3.
[Authentication Algorithm]
If you selected [Authentication but no encryption] or [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], select the
authentication algorithm.
[Authentication Password]
If you selected [Authentication but no encryption] or [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], set the
authentication password.
[Encryption Algorithm]
If you selected [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], select the encryption algorithm.
[Encryption Password]
If you selected [Authentication and encryption] for [Security Level], set the encryption password.
FTP Server
[Use FTP Server]
The settings for using an FTP server.
[User Name]
Set the name of the user to allow FTP connections for.
[Password]
Set the password of the user to allow FTP connections for.
Important
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of FTP software.
When changing the user name, make sure to also change the password.
If you set the same user name as a user name used in the system, the message “User name is invalid.” is displayed. In this case, set
another user name.
140
WS-Security
[Check Time on Authentication]
Select whether to check the time information of data transmitted by the client.
Setting Page
5
141
Settings for clients that can connect to a video server.
Video Server
[Maximum Number of Clients]
Enter the maximum number of clients that can be connected to the camera at the same time.
If set to [0], only administrators will be able to connect.
[Camera Control Queue Length]
Enter the maximum queue length for clients requesting camera control privileges from the Camera Viewer.
If set to [0], only administrators can queue for camera control.
[Maximum Connection Time (sec.)]
Enter the maximum time in seconds during which an individual client can connect to the camera.
If set to [0], the connection time is unlimited.
[Camera Control Time (sec.)]
Enter the maximum time Camera Viewer can retain camera control privileges.
[Server] > [Video Server]
Video Transmission Settings
Important
When there are many clients or they are connected to the camera over an SSL/TLS connection, the video frame rate may slow down and
the sound may drop out if audio reception from the camera is enabled.
The following settings can be configured here.
Video Server
142
Set the video and audio transmission using RTP.
RTP Server
Enable RTP, and set the RTSP authentication method and port number.
[RTP]
Select this to enable or disable RTP.
[RTSP Authentication Method]
Select an authentication method for RTSP. Since the RTSP authentication method is configured independently of the HTTP
authentication method, you need to configure each authentication method.
[RTSP Port]
Enter the RTSP port number.
Normally use [554] (factory default setting).
Audio Multicast
Set multicast for audio transmission.
[Multicast Address]
Enter the multicast address for audio transmission as follows.
IPv4: Range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
IPv6: Address starting with ff00::/8
Set IPv4 to [0.0.0.0] and IPv6 to [::0 (::)] to disable multicast.
[Multicast Port]
Enter the multicast port number for audio transmission.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
[Multicast TTL]
Enter the effective range for multicast transmission.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective range for multicast transmission, is decremented each time the signal
passes through a router. When the value reaches 0, the signal can no longer pass through the router and be transmitted.
For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast transmission is confined to the local segment only and cannot pass through the
router to be transmitted.
[Server] > [RTP Server]
RTP Settings
The following settings can be configured here.
RTP Server
Audio Multicast
RTP Stream 1 to 5
Setting Page
5
143
RTP Stream 1 to 5
You can set each stream for RTP stream transmission in an RTP Stream 1 to RTP Stream 5 session.
[Video Size]
Select the video format (JPEG or H.264) and video size for the RTP stream.
The video sizes for JPEG will vary depending on the [Video Size Set] settings (P. 91).
The video sizes for H.264 will be determined according to the [H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] settings in [Video] (P. 92).
In addition, [H.264(2)] cannot be set for multiple RTP streams.
[Frame Rate]
Enter the frame rate if the RTP stream is JPEG video.
This cannot be set for H.264 video. The [Frame Rate] setting in [Video] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] will be used.
[Multicast Address]
Enter the multicast address for RTP streaming as follows.
IPv4: Range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
IPv6: Address starting with ff00::/8
Enter [0.0.0.0] for IPv4 and [::0(::)] for IPv6 to disable multicast.
[Multicast Port]
Enter the multicast port number for RTP streaming.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
[Multicast TTL]
Enter the effective range for multicast transmission of RTP streams.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective range for multicast transmission, is decremented each time the signal
passes through a router. When the value reaches 0, the signal can no longer pass through the router and be transmitted.
For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast transmission is confined to the local segment only and cannot pass through the
router to be transmitted.
[Audio Transmission]
Select whether to use audio transmission for RTP streaming.
[Enable] cannot be selected if [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio] > [Audio Input] is set to [Disable].
Note
RTP Streaming URL
rtsp://IP Address:Port Number/rtpstream/config1(to 5)=r|u|m
[=r|u|m] is optional and can be omitted. If specified, specify only one option.
r: Requests RTP over TCP
u: Requests RTP over UDP
m: Requests multicast
Example: RTP Stream 1 request using RTP over TCP
rtsp://192.168.100.1:554/rtpstream/config1=r
Caution: Note that the actual operation is dependent on the RTP client application, so the URL does not necessarily specify the method
used for transmission.
When H.264 is selected, bit rate control and video quality are each set with [Video] (P. 92).
The [Video Distribution] and [Audio Distribution] settings in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority] are not used for RTP.
RTP streaming video may not be viewable on systems using a proxy server or firewall. If this occurs, contact your system administrator.
If Host Access Restrictions are applied to a client while it is streaming using RTP over UDP, it may take from a few to tens of seconds
until streaming ceases.
Regardless of the [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] setting, RTP streaming audio
will be used.
144
Settings for uploading video via HTTP or FTP when an event is triggered.
Use [Server] > [Server] (P. 138) to configure HTTP server and FTP server settings for uploading.
Video Record Settings
When an event is triggered, you can set whether to upload camera video with HTTP or FTP or to record the video to a
memory card.
This item can also be set with the [Memory Card] submenu (P. 196) and will be reflected in [Video Record Settings] here.
[Video Record Action]
Select [Upload] to upload video.
General Upload
Set the upload method and video format for upload.
[Upload]
Select whether to upload with HTTP or FTP.
[Video Record] > [Upload]
HTTP and FTP Upload Settings
Important
When using the upload function or recording to a memory card, the following settings are required according to each event.
[Video Record] settings configured with [Event] > [Timer].
[Video Record] settings configured with each of the [Event] > [External Device], [Audio Detection] and [Linked Events].
The setting in the [Event] tab of the Intelligent Function (P. 178).
When using the upload function, or recording to the memory card, do not change the settings in the [Settings Page]. Doing so may
result in the upload function or the recording to memory card to stop.
If you are using either HTTP or FTP upload together with e-mail notification by text and video, set [Video] > [JPEG] > [Video Size:
Upload / Memory card] (P. 92) to a small size.
HTTP upload does not support SSL/TLS.
If the camera is set to upload or send e-mail notification continuously, not all video or e-mails may be sent depending on the video size
and the network condition to the server. If this occurs, a message is written to the log (P. 203).
If the destination for HTTP or FTP upload, or e-mail notification is set for a Windows operating system, IPsec communication is not
supported.
The following settings can be configured here.
Video Record Settings
General Upload
HTTP Upload
FTP Upload
Setting Page
5
145
[Video Format]
Select the video format for upload.
Video size and quality of the uploaded video follow the settings in [Video] (P. 91).
[Frame Rate]
Enter the maximum frame rate of video to be uploaded when [Video Format] is set to [JPEG].
[Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Pre-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered before the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video
Format].
[Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Post-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered after the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video
Format].
Note
If the server or network load increases due to the upload settings, the video frame rate may drop. If this occurs, reconfigure the following
settings to reduce the size and frequency of uploaded data.
Set a lower value for [Video Size: Upload / Memory card] for [JPEG] (P. 92).
Reduce the number of frames or seconds in [Pre-event Buffer] or [Post-event Buffer].
If [Volume Detection Event] is enabled, disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or [Ongoing ON Event Operation] (P. 152).
From the Intelligent Function [Event] tab, disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or [Detected mode Operation] (P. 178).
If [External Device Input Event] is enabled, disable [Active Event Operation], [Inactive Event Operation] or [Ongoing Active Event
Operation] (P. 150).
If [Timer Event] is enabled, increase the value in [Repeat Interval] (P. 155).
HTTP Upload
Settings for the HTTP upload function when [Upload] is set to [HTTP Upload].
The HTTP upload function sends notifications via HTTP or via HTTP with attached images, depending on the network
camera event.
For information about the HTTP upload function and settings, contact your nearest Canon Customer Service Center.
[Notification]
Select whether to send event information notifications only or notifications with attached videos when using HTTP upload.
[URI]
Enter the HTTP server URI to which to upload.
[User Name], [Password]
Enter the user name and password required for authentication.
Digest authentication is not supported.
[Proxy Server]
If using a proxy server, enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server.
Important
For H.264(1) or H.264(2), the following settings must be configured in [Video] > [H.264(1)] (P. 92) or [H.264(2)] (P. 93).
[Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)]
[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less
[I Frame Interval (sec)]: [0.5], [1] or [1.5]
You cannot select a different H.264 format from that in [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] > [Video Format] (P. 197).
Important
The maximum video buffer size capacity is approx. 56 MB ( )/approx. 5 MB ( ). If a large video
size is set, the Frame Rate, Pre-event Buffer and Post-event Buffer may not be achieved as specified.
If buffering cannot be achieved as specified, a message is written to the log (P. 203). Confirm that no messages are displayed in the log.
HM4x
H730
S30
S31
S80x
S90x
146
[Proxy Port]
If using a proxy server, enter the port number of the proxy server.
[Proxy User Name], [Proxy Password]
Enter to use a user name and password for the proxy server.
Digest authentication is not supported.
[Parameter (query string)]
Enter the request parameters.
Parameters can be specified using the “%” character (P. 206).
[HTTP Upload Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the settings currently entered.
Only a single JPEG image will be uploaded, but it is not necessary to click [Apply] at that time. After entering a password,
first click [Exec], then click [Apply].
FTP Upload
Settings for the FTP upload function when [Upload] is set to [FTP Upload].
[Notification]
This is set to [Video data upload with FTP].
[FTP Server]
Enter the host name or IP address of FTP server.
[User Name], [Password]
Enter the user name and password required for authentication.
[PASV Mode]
Select whether to use PASV mode when connecting to an FTP server.
[File Upload Path]
Enter a remote path (directory name) for video files to be uploaded to.
[File Naming]
Select a file naming rule for the upload file.
[YYYYMMDDHHMMSSms]
Video is uploaded according to the file name format of “{year}{month}{day}{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.
(Example: 20160123112122000.jpg)
[YYYYMMDD Directory/HHMMSSms]
A subdirectory named “{year}{month}{day}” is created first, and then the video is uploaded using the file name
“{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.
(Example: 20160123/112122000.jpg)
[Loop]
Video is loaded with a file name numbered in sequence from 0000 up to the value set in [Maximum Number of Loops].
(Example: 0000.jpg, 0001.jpg) The number will return to 0000 when the maximum number of loops is reached.
Since the way FTP servers manage the upload of files with existing file names differs as follows, be sure to check the FTP
server specifications before configuring this setting.
Overwrite the existing file name
Automatically save the file with a different name
Generate an error
[Maximum Number of Loops]
If [Loop] is set under [File Naming], enter the maximum number of loops.
[User Settings]
Video is uploaded according to the file naming method specified in [Subdirectory Name to Create] and [File Name to
Create].
Important
Enter [Proxy Server], [Proxy Port], [Proxy User Name] and [Proxy Password] if connecting via a proxy server.
Setting Page
5
147
[Subdirectory Name to Create], [File Name to Create]
If [File Naming] is set to [User Settings], enter the subdirectory name to be created as well as the name of the created
file.
Parameters can be specified in the entry with the “%” character (P. 206).
[FTP Upload Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the settings currently entered.
Only a single JPEG will be uploaded, but it is not necessary to click [Apply] at that time. After entering a password,
first click [Exec], then click [Apply].
148
Settings for sending an e-mail notification to a specified recipient when an event is triggered.
E-mail Notification
Set the mail server to be used for e-mail notifications and the content of the e-mail to be sent.
[Notification]
[Subject] and [Message Body] are text.
If you set [Text with Video], an image (JPEG format) captured immediately before the event will be attached.
[Copy E-mail Settings]
Copy the e-mail settings used in [Maintenance] > [Log] > [Log Notifications] (P. 203). However, the password is not copied.
[Mail Server Name]
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
[Mail Server Port]
Enter the port number for the SMTP server.
[Sender (From)]
Enter the e-mail address of the sender.
[Recipient (To)]
Enter the e-mail address of the recipient.
[Authentication]
Select an authentication method suited to the destination SMTP server.
[User Name], [Password], [POP Server]
Enter the user name and password needed for authentication, and the POP server host name or IP address when e-mail
authentication is set to [POP before SMTP].
[User Name], [Password]
Enter the user name and password needed for authentication when e-mail authentication is set to [SMTP-AUTH].
[Subject]
Enter the subject of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.
[Message Body]
Enter the message body (text) of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.
Parameters can be specified in the text using the “%” character (P. 206).
[E-mail Notification Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an e-mail notification test based on the settings currently entered.
It is not necessary to click [Apply]. After entering a password, first click [Exec], then click [Apply].
[Video Record] > [E-mail Notification]
Setting E-mail Notification
The following settings can be configured here.
E-mail Notification
Setting Page
5
149
Operation settings for external device output and for external device input triggered events.
External Device Output
Set the operation for output to the external device.
The camera has two external device outputs. You can set the output for each of them.
Note
The output for an external device can be switched between active and inactive with [External Device Output] of the Camera Viewer (P. 72).
[Operation Mode]
Select whether the output terminals are normally open or closed.
If you set [Normally Open], an active event occurs when the output terminal connection closes, and an inactive event
occurs when the output terminal connection opens.
If you set [Normally Close], an active event occurs when the output terminal connection opens, and an inactive event
occurs when the output terminal connection closes.
[Active Output Format]
Select the output format when the external device output is active.
[Pulse Output Time (sec)]
Enter the output duration time (sec.) when [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse].
[Event] > [External Device]
External Device Input Triggered Operation Settings
The following settings can be configured here.
External Device Output 1, 2
External Device Input
External Device Input 1, 2
HM4x
H730
Normally Open
Active Event Status
Inactive Event Status
1 (The contact is closed.)
0 (The contact is open.)
Normally Close
Inactive Event Status
Active Event Status
1 (The contact is closed.)
0 (The contact is open.)
150
External Device Input
[External Device Input Event]
Select whether to use the input from an external device, such as a connected sensor, as an event.
External Device Input 1, 2
You can set the operation to be performed when an event is triggered by input from an external device.
The camera has two external device inputs. You can set the input for each of them.
You can set these if you have selected [Enable] in [External Device Input Event].
Note
An icon in the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer will indicate when there is an external device input event (P.72).
[Operation Mode]
Select the circuit condition to suit the signal input from the connected external device.
When [Normally Open] is set, an active event occurs when the terminals of the external device close, and an inactive event
occurs when the terminals open.
When [Normally Close] is set, an active event occurs when the terminals of the external device open, and an inactive event
occurs when the terminals close.
[Active Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed when an active event is triggered.
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their
settings when an active event is triggered.
[Inactive Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed when an inactive event is triggered.
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their
settings when an inactive event is completed.
[Ongoing Active Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed during an active event. This can only be set when [Active Event Operation] is set to
[Enable].
If [Enable] is set, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the active
event.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when an external device input event
is triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 118).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the event.
If you select [Enable] and an external device input event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination
specified in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 144).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the event.
If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification will be performed when an external device input event is triggered.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 148) beforehand.
Important
When [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse] and a timer is used (P. 155), contact output is controlled only once when the timer starts.
Important
When the camera is moved to a preset position specified in the [Preset] settings, camera control privileges are released, even if the user
has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.
(Title Is Displayed for Only)
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
Setting Page
5
151
[External Device Output for Active Event]
Select the actions of external device output when an active event is triggered.
[External Device Output for Inactive Event]
Select the actions of external device output when an inactive event is triggered.
[Audio Playback at Active Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back at active events for the external device input.
[Audio Playback at Inactive Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back at inactive events for the external device input.
[Sound Clip]
Select the sound clip when [Audio Playback at Active Event] or [Audio Playback at Inactive Event] has been set to
[Enable].
You must register the sound clip with Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3 (P. 137) in [Video and Audio] > [Audio] in advance.
[Volume]
Enter the volume for the sound clip.
[Day/Night Mode Switching]
Select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when an external device input event is triggered.
When [Switch to Day Mode] is set, switches to Day Mode when an active event is triggered, and switches to Night Mode
when an inactive event is triggered.
When [Switch to Night Mode] is set, switches to Night Mode when an active event is triggered, and switches to Day Mode
when an inactive event is triggered.
Important
When [Camera] > [Initial Settings] > [Day/Night] is set to [Auto] (P. 105), [Day/Night Mode Switching] will not happen when an external
device input event is triggered.
When the [Day/Night Mode Switching] settings switch Day/Night Mode, camera control privileges are released, even if the user has
obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
152
Audio input from the microphone connected to the camera, such as loud noises or screams, or when expected audio input
ceases, can trigger operations such as video recording or e-mail notification.
Note
You can check the audio detection status on the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer (P. 73).
Volume Detection
A volume detection event will be triggered when audio input volume is detected exceeding or falling below the reference
volume setting.
Set the conditions for triggering a volume detection event and the operations to perform according to an event.
[Volume Detection Event]
Select whether to use volume detection event.
[Enable] cannot be selected if [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio] > [Audio Input] is set to [Disable].
[Detection Conditions]
Select the criteria for triggering a volume detection event.
[Reference Volume Level]
Enter the reference volume level to be used for detection.
Set the reference volume level by performing an actual test while checking [Current Volume Level] before configuring the
setting.
[Current Volume Level]
The current volume level is displayed on the status bar.
The level set in [Reference Volume Level] is indicated by a red mark. Volume below the reference level is displayed in blue,
that above the reference level is displayed in red.
[Detection Condition Duration (sec)]
When the status meeting the volume detection criteria has continued for the specified duration or longer, an ON event is
triggered.
[Event] > [Audio Detection]
Abnormal Audio Input Triggered Operation Settings
Important
For notes on use of audio detection, please refer to “Precautions for Built-In Camera Functions and Software” (P. 8) in “Safety
Precautions”.
Important
Volume detection is temporarily disabled when an event causes the playback of a sound clip or when audio is transmitted from the
Viewer.
The following settings can be configured here.
Volume Detection
Scream Detection
Setting Page
5
153
[ON Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their
settings when a volume detection event is triggered (ON event).
[OFF Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their
settings when a volume detection event is completed (OFF event).
[Ongoing ON Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed during an ON event. This can be set when [ON Event Operation] is set to [Enable].
If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the
volume detection event.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a volume detection event is
triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 118).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the volume detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a volume detection event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination
specified in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 144).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the volume detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a volume detection event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 148) beforehand.
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select the actions of the external device output when an ON event is triggered.
[External Device Output for OFF Event]
Select the actions of the external device output when an OFF event is triggered.
Scream Detection
A scream detection event is triggered when sounds from someone, such as a scream or cry, are detected.
You can also set the operations to perform depending on the scream detection event.
[Scream Detection Event]
Select whether to use scream detection event.
[Enable] cannot be selected if [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio] > [Audio Input] is set to [Disable].
[ON Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their
settings when a scream detection event (ON event) is triggered.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a scream detection event is
triggered.
Important
When the camera is triggered by a volume detection event and moved to a preset position specified in the [Preset] settings, camera
control privileges are released, even if the user has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera
control applications.
Important
Scream detection detects abnormal sound in relatively quiet environments. Detection is difficult in noisy environments.
The scream detection is not a voice recognition function.
Detection may be difficult if an excessively loud scream is input.
Detection may be difficult if the duration of the scream is short.
Detection may be temporarily difficult if the same sound is input repeatedly multiple times.
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
154
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 118).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the scream detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a scream detection event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination
specified in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 144).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the scream detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a scream detection event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 148) beforehand.
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select the actions of the external device output when an ON event is triggered.
Important
When the camera is triggered by a scream detection event and moved to a preset position specified in the [Preset] settings, camera
control privileges are released, even if the user has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera
control applications.
HM4x
S30 S31
Setting Page
5
155
The timer function can generate events that can trigger operations, such as video recording and e-mail notifications, at
regular intervals.
You can set the following two types of timers.
24 hours continuous from specified time
Within specified time only
Either type can be set to trigger timer events at regular intervals.
Timer 1 to 4
You can register up to four timer events.
[Timer Event]
Select whether to use a timer event.
[24-Hour Continuous Settings]
When set to [Enable], the timer event will be repeated at the interval in [Repeat Interval] for 24 hours, starting from the time
specified in [Start Time].
When set to [Enable], only [Video Record] operations can be performed.
[Start Time]
Enter the start time of the timer event in 24-hour format. The timer event will be triggered at the start time.
[End Time]
When [24-Hour Continuous Settings] is set to [Disable], enter the end time of the timer event in the 24-hour format.
[Repeat Interval]
Select a repeat interval for timer events. The timer event will be triggered at the selected intervals.
Operation
Set the operations to be performed when timer events are triggered.
[Start Time Preset]
When [24-Hour Continuous Settings] is set to [Disable] and you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move
to the preset location at the time set in [Start Time].
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 118).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the timer event.
[Event] > [Timer]
Timer Triggered Operation Settings
Important
When the camera is moved to a preset position specified in the [Start Time Preset] settings, camera control privileges are released, even
if the user has obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.
The following settings can be configured here.
Timer 1 to 4
•Operation
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
156
If you select [Enable] and a timer event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination specified in
[Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 144).
[E-mail Notification]
When [24-Hour Continuous Settings] is set to [Disable], select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the timer
event.
If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification is performed when a timer event is triggered.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 148) beforehand.
[External Device Output]
When [24-Hour Continuous Settings] is set to [Disable], select the actions of the external device output at [Start Time] and
[End Time] of a timer.
[Repeat Interval] is not supported.
[Day/Night Mode Switching]
When [24-Hour Continuous Settings] is set to [Disable], select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when a timer event is
triggered. This can only be set with [Timer 1].
Select [Switch to Day Mode] to switch to Day Mode at the start time, and Night Mode at the end time.
Select [Switch to Night Mode] to switch to Night Mode at the start time, and Day Mode at the end time.
[Repeat Interval] is not supported.
Important
If you set [Start Time] and [End Time] and select a preset with [Start Time Preset], the Day/Night setting in [Camera] > [Preset] >
[Camera Settings] > [Day/Night] (P. 118) is given priority. Therefore, even if you set [Day/Night Mode Switching] to [Switch to Day
Mode] or [Switch to Night Mode], the [Day/Night Mode Switching] setting will be disabled if the opposite setting has been configured
in [Preset] > [Camera Settings].
When [Day/Night] in [Camera] > [Initial Settings] is set to [Auto] (P. 105), [Day/Night Mode Switching] will not happen when a timer
event is triggered.
When the [Day/Night Mode Switching] settings switch Day/Night Mode, camera control privileges are released, even if the user has
obtained those camera control privileges using the Camera Viewer or other camera control applications.
HM4x
S30 S31
Setting Page
5
157
Intelligent Function
The Intelligent Function records video, sends e-mail notifications, plays audio and starts other operations when it detects
changes in the video due to subject movement.
The Intelligent Function has the following modes.
Video Detection
•Audio Detection
[Event] > [Intelligent Function]
- Overview -
Notes on Use of This Camera
The Intelligent Function is not suitable for applications where high reliability is required. If constant and maximum reliability
is required for surveillance it is not recommended that you use this function. Canon shall assume no liability for any
accident, loss or other undesirable outcomes resulting from Intelligent Function operations.
Camera Viewer
RM Viewer
Camera
E-mail Notification
Network
Video Recording on
Storage Server
Upload to FTP
Server/HTTP
Server
Audio Detection
Moving Object Detection
Removed Object
Detection
Abandoned Object
Detection
Passing
Detection
Camera Tampering Detection
Intrusion Detection
158
Video Detection
Detects changes to video in a specified area. There are six types of detection to suit your needs.
Moving Object Detection
Detects moving objects. This function can be used to detect visitors or suspicious individuals.
Moving object detection is triggered while moving objects are inside the detection area.
Abandoned Object Detection
Detect objects that are carried in and abandoned for a certain duration. This function can be used to detect
suspicious objects that have been left behind. Abandoned object detection is triggered when an object is left in the
detection area for a specified duration.
Removed Object Detection
Detect objects that have been removed. This can be used to detect actions such as the taking away of valuables.
Removed object detection is triggered when an object is removed from the detection area for a specified duration.
Background Video Generated
Moving object enters/leaves area
Change in Designated Area Analysis Moving Object Detected
Detection begins when a
moving object enters the
designated area.
Detected
Background Video Generated
Object abandoned
Change in Designated Area Analysis Abandoned Object Detected
The object is abandoned
and detection begins after
specified duration.
Detected
Background Video Generated
Removing an object
Change in Designated Area Analysis Object Removal Detected
The picture (object) is
removed and detection
begins after a specified
duration.
Detected
Setting Page
5
159
Camera Tampering Detection
Detect when capture is being disrupted. This can be used to detect when the camera orientation is changed or the
video display is obscured with spray, etc. Camera tampering detection is triggered when an area exceeding a
specified ratio of change is continuously altered.
Passing Detection
Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified line.
This determines that an object is passing when the decision point of the object detection frame crosses a detection
line.
Intrusion Detection
Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified area. This can be used to detect actions such as when
someone climbs over a barrier and enters a restricted area in a museum, etc. This determines that an object is entering
when the decision point of the object detection frame enters the detection area and the specified duration has elapsed.
Background Video
Generated
Tampering
Video Changes Analysis Camera Tampering
Detected
Detection begins when the ratio
of change in a video exceeds a
specified amount.
Detected
Background Video
Generated
Passing
Video Changes
Analysis
Passing Detected
Detection begins when the
decision point crosses the
specified detection line.
Detected
Decision Point
Detection
Frame
Background Video
Generated
Intrusion
Video Changes Analysis Intrusion
Detected
Detection begins when the
decision point enters the
detection area.
Detected
Decision
Point
Detection
Frame
160
Audio Detection
Detects audio input to the camera. There are two types of detection.
These are set with [Event] > [Audio Detection] (P. 152), not with [Intelligent Function].
[Volume Detection]: Detects when volume level exceeds or falls below a reference volume.
[Scream Detection]: Detects screams or cries from people.
Notes on Intelligent Function Settings and Operations
When setting the Intelligent Function, do an actual detection test to confirm that detection will be performed correctly.
If a sudden change in lightness or darkness occurs within the entire screen, proper detection may not be possible for up
to five minutes.
Detection will not be performed while the Intelligent Function is restarting.
If the camera is operated while configuring or using the Intelligent Function, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.]
is displayed and the Intelligent Function will restart.
If the display switches between Day mode and Night mode, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.] is shown and
intelligent function will restart.
If [Basic] > [Video] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings on the Setting Page are changed, be sure to change the
preset position settings ( ) and Intelligent Function settings, and check operations. The Intelligent
Function may not operate, depending on the settings.
When the image is zoomed in (telephoto), detection may not work as expected.
Please set the Intelligent Function again if the angle of view has changed through camera operation, or the preset/home
position has changed.
If [Status] in [Detection Settings] has [Enable] when the camera position is fixed, control privileges cannot be obtained
by the Viewer connected by the user without privileges for privileged camera control or RM Viewer.
Also, the preset tour will no longer run.
If you use a preset registered with the digital zoom, the camera position at registration may not be able to be reproduced
with a high degree of accuracy. Therefore, it is recommended that you use a preset registered in the optical zoom area
for the intelligent function.
Difficult-to-Detect Subjects
The following subjects may not be detected, or may result in erroneous detection.
Objects or areas where there is little contrast in color or brightness with the background may not be detected.
Small objects and changes on the screen may not be detected.
Partial or entire changes in brightness on the screen may trigger detection.
When there are multiple overlapping objects, there may be a change in detection. For example, objects passing
may either not be detected or the timing of detection may be incorrect.
When there are large numbers of objects in the scene, objects may not be properly detected.
Registering Presets
It is strongly recommended that you register the camera angle as a preset in advance and lock the camera to that position
when using video detection. It is also recommended that the angle of view that captures targeted objects at a larger ratio be
used.
For details on preset registration, please refer to “[Camera] > [Preset] Registering Presets” (P. 118).
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
HM4x
HM4x
S30
HM4x
S30 S31
Setting Page
5
161
In video detection, select the type to detect, and set the detection area for video changes while checking images on the
camera. You should also set which operations (e-mail notification, record video, outputting to an external device) should be
carried out when changes are detected.
Steps for Configuring Video Detection
Set an area where changes in video are detected and an area where changes in video are not detected (non-detection
area) as necessary.
Configuring the Detection Area
The following are the basic steps for configuring a detection area. For details on settings for each type of detection,
please refer to “Configuring Detection Criteria ([Detection Conditions] Tab)” (P. 165).
For details on how to adjust presets, please refer to “[Camera] > [Preset] Registering Presets” (P. 118).
Note
You can select presets that meet the following conditions.
Presets configured within the view restrictions
Presets with pan, tilt and zoom setting values (not blank) configured in [Register Preset] (P. 119)
[Event] > [Intelligent Function]
- Video Detection -
The following settings can be configured here.
Detection Settings (List)
Non-detection Area Settings (List)
Display Options
Camera Position Settings
Detection Settings (Details)
Non-detection Settings (Details)
1
Select the [Lock camera position] checkbox in [Camera Position Settings], then select a preset.
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
162
Note
You can register up to 15 detection settings.
The detection settings added to [Detection Settings] are displayed and [Enable these detection settings] is
selected.
Note
To disable the detection settings, clear the [Enable these detection settings] checkbox.
Enter the [Detection Settings Name] if necessary (P. 166).
To delete detection area settings, select the detection area settings to delete and click [Delete] in Detection Settings (List).
2
Click [Add] in [Detection Settings].
3
Select [Detection Settings Number] (1 to 15) and [Detection Type] for the detection setting to be added.
4
Click [OK].
Setting Page
5
163
Set criteria in the video display area or [Detection Conditions] tab (P. 165). The detection criteria differ according
to the detection type.
Set which operations to carry out for video detection in the [Event] tab (P. 178).
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
To restore settings, click [Clear] before applying. This discards the settings you have specified and restores the settings saved in
the camera. However, note that detection settings only added to the detection setting area by clicking [Add] are all discarded.
You can check the detection status of the specified detection settings in video display area, the [Event] column in
[Detection Settings] or the [Event and Input/Output] menu in the Camera Viewer (P. 72).
Setting a Non-Detection Area
You can set an area where changes are not detected, to prevent mis-detection and non-detection.
5
Configure the detection criteria.
6
Configure event settings.
7
To register multiple detection settings, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8
Click [Apply].
9
Check the detection result.
164
The non-detection area settings added in [Non-Detection Settings] are displayed and the [Enable non-detection
area] checkbox is selected.
Note
Up to five non-detection area settings can be registered.
To disable non-detection area settings, clear the [Enable non-detection area] checkbox.
To delete non-detection area settings, select the non-detection area settings to delete and click [Delete] in Non-detection Area
Settings (List).
Important
The non-detection area set in the non-detection area settings is reflected in all detection settings.
If the area in the detection settings and the area in the non-detection area settings overlap, the non-detection settings are
prioritized.
1
Click [Non-Detection Settings] to display the list of non-detection area settings.
2
Click [Add].
Setting Page
5
165
Click the mouse to create a polygon. For information on the creation method, please refer to “Using [Polygonal]”
(P. 166).
Note
You can create a polygonal area with a maximum of 32 vertices. You cannot set a non-detection area with only a straight line.
Click [Clear Area] to set the non-detection area again.
Enter [Non-detection Area Name (within 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)] as necessary.
The non-detection area is shown in the video display area in black. The display color cannot be selected.
The settings are saved in the camera.
Note
Click [Clear] to discard the settings and restore the settings saved in the camera. However, note that non-detection areas only
added to the non-detection areas by clicking [Add] are all discarded.
The status of the specified non-detection settings can be checked in the video display area and the [Status]
column in [Non-Detection Settings].
If the [Enable non-detection area] checkbox is cleared, [Disable] is displayed for the [Status] column in [Non-
Detection Settings], and the non-detection area is not shown in the video display area.
Configuring Detection Criteria ([Detection Conditions] Tab)
Detection criteria is controlled and set in the video display area for each type of detection.
3
Set a non-detection area in the video display area.
4
To register multiple non-detection areas, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5
Click [Apply].
6
Check the detection result.
Important
Make sure to check the video display area to see whether the detection area and non-detection area are unintentionally
overlapped.
If you set the detection area and non-detection area close to each other, detection may be performed incorrectly.
Important
It is recommended that you configure the detection criteria in conditions as close as possible to the actual conditions in which you will
use the camera.
166
Settings Common to Each Detection Type
(1) [Detection Settings Name (within 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)]
Enter a detection name. Be sure to enter a name in [Detection Settings Name (within 64 half-width alphanumeric
characters)].
(2) [Area Shape]
Configure whether the detection area is a rectangle or a free-shape polygon.
Note
You cannot select [Area Shape] for camera tampering detection.
Using [Rectangular]
Configure the detection area by moving, resizing or changing the shape of the rectangle that is shown in the
video display area.
Drag the area to move it, and drag the vertices to resize it.
Using [Polygonal]
Click the video display area to place a vertex for the polygon at the clicked position.
Place the vertices in order, then either click the first vertex again or double-click the last vertex to set the polygon
detection area.
Drag the area to move it, and drag the vertices to resize it.
You can specify polygonal areas with a maximum of 32 vertices.
Note
If you change the shape of a detection area you have already configured, the area is deleted and you switch to configuring a new
area.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Setting Page
5
167
[Clear Area]
The detection area configured with [Polygonal] is deleted.
(3) [Display Color]
Select the color for detection areas and detection lines.
How to Configure Moving Object Detection
Set the area you want to detect a moving object in as a detection area.
This determines how large the moving object must be in relation to the detection area you set in step 2 for motion
detection to be triggered.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is shown for one second in
the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
Detection Status for Moving Object Detection
All moving objects detected are displayed with profile lines.
If a moving object is smaller than [Object Size (%)], its profile lines are white.
If the moving object is larger than [Object Size (%)], its profile lines take on the same color as the detection area
indicating “detected” status has been triggered.
1
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
2
In the video display area, draw the area in which you would like to detect moving objects (P. 166).
3
Configure the size of the object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
Profile Lines of Detected Moving Object
168
Note
If an object is placed in or removed from the moving object detection area, “detected” status will be triggered for Moving Object
Detection.
How to Configure Abandoned Object Detection
Set the area you want to detect an abandoned object in as a detection area.
This determines how large the abandoned object must be in the detection area you set in step 2 to detect as an
abandoned object.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is shown for one second in
the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while setting.
Detection Status for Abandoned Object Detection
All moving objects detected are displayed with profile lines.
If [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are not met, profile lines are white.
If both [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are exceeded, the profile lines take on the same color as the detection
area, indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.
1
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
2
In the video display area, draw the area in which you would like to detect abandoned objects (P. 166).
3
Configure the size of the object needed for detection in [Object Size (%)].
4
Configure [Duration (Sec)] for the time required for an object to be detected as an abandoned object.
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
Setting Page
5
169
How to Configure Removed Object Detection
Set an area around the target objects, for Removed Object Detection. The following methods are available for
configuring removed object detection.
Setting a broad area for detecting the removal of objects
Specifying the profile lines of objects for removal detection
If you cannot detect the intended objects using one of these methods, use the other method.
Setting a Broad Area for Detecting Removed Objects
Configure the following settings with the [Specify a profile and detect] checkbox cleared.
Set how large an object that is removed must be to trigger removed object detection in the detection area set in
step 2.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is shown for one second in
the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
A removed object is detected when the setting value in [Object Size (%)] is exceeded.
Profile lines of detected abandoned object
1
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
2
In the video display area, draw a broad area to detect removed objects (P. 166).
3
Configure the size of the object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].
Set detection area
170
Specifying the Profile Lines of Objects for Removal Detection
Temporarily remove the target object for removed object detection from the video display area.
Click [Restart intelligent function] (P. 179).
The background image is generated
Return the target object to its original position.
Click [Automatic Profile Settings].
A profile line of the object is drawn using a polygon with up to 32 vertices.
If there are multiple objects detected, the profile lines are drawn around the object occupying the largest area.
4
Configure [Duration (Sec)] for time required for an object to be detected as a removed object.
5
Click [Apply].
Important
A removed object may not be detected in the following cases.
When long and thin objects are removed
When the same object is placed continuously and some of the objects are removed
When objects of the same shape are placed together and some of the objects are removed
If the video inside the detection area changes without an object being removed, it may be misdetected as a removed object.
1
Select the [Specify a profile and detect] checkbox.
2
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
3
Use the video display area to configure an area along the profile lines of the object you do not want removed
(P. 166).
Alternatively, set the profile lines automatically using the following procedure.
Set detection area
Setting Page
5
171
Click [Restart intelligent function] again.
Detection Status for Removed Object Detection
All moving objects detected are displayed with profile lines.
If you set [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)], the following occurs.
If [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are not met, the profile line is displayed with a white line.
If both [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are exceeded, the profile line is displayed in the same color as
the detection area to indicate that something has been detected.
If removed object detection is set in [Specify a profile and detect], the following occurs.
As long as [Duration (Sec)] is not exceeded, profile lines are white.
When [Duration (Sec)] is exceeded, profile lines take on the same color as the detection area, indicating that an
object has been removed.
How to Configure Camera Tampering Detection
For [Camera Tampering Detection], the entire video display area is the detection area. The area cannot be changed.
In [Change Ratio (%)], you can set the ratio of screen change for the entire video display area to determine as
tampering detection.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the ratio of the entire video display area is
shown for one second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check while specifying the setting.
Important
Set detection areas so that they precisely match the profile lines of the target object. Influence from the target object’s shadow or
adjacent objects may result in the target object being recognized as larger than it actually is and may not trigger removed object
detection. If this occurs, reconfigure the detection area to outline the recognized target object.
4
Follow steps 4–5 in “Setting a Broad Area for Detecting Removed Objects” (P. 170).
Profile lines of detected removed object
172
Detection Status for Camera Tampering Detection
Moving objects detected are displayed with profile lines.
If an object is smaller than [Change Ratio (%)], its profile lines are white.
If the obscured area in the video exceeds [Change Ratio (%)], profile lines take on the same color as the detection
area, indicating that the camera has “detected” tampering.
Note
Detection will not be possible for three seconds after the change ratio for camera tampering detection is changed, or when
switching to camera tampering detection settings from settings for another detection mode.
How to Configure Passing Detection
The detection line for passing moving objects is determined by setting the passing direction and object decision
point.
In the video display area, click the start point of the detection line.
Click another point.
The passing detection line will be set between the start point and next point you clicked.
Change Ratio indicator
Profile lines of detected tampered object
1
Follow the steps below to configure the passing detection line in the video display area.
Setting Page
5
173
To configure a polygonal detection line, click the vertices of the line in order.
You can configure a polygonal detection line with a maximum of 32 vertices.
Click any of the set vertices.
The detection line is determined.
Note
Even after configuring a detection line, you can drag each vertex to change the shape of the detection line and the lines between
vertices to move the entire detection line.
Click [Clear Line] to delete a detection line.
If a moving object crosses the detection line in the selected direction, it will be detected as ‘passed’.
A preview display shows the selected passing direction on the detection line in the video display area.
If the selected decision point crosses the detection line, it will be detected as ‘passed’.
The decision point is indicated by a cross on the detection frame of the moving object.
Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.
If the moving object exceeds the set value for [Object Size (%)], it will be targeted for passing detection.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is shown for one second in
the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
2
In [Passing Direction], select the direction for moving objects to pass the detection line.
3
In [Decision Point], select the point of a moving object that will be used for triggering passing detection when the
moving object crosses a detection line.
4
Configure the size of the moving object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].
Detection line
Detection line
Passing direction (both directions)
Detection Frame
Decision point (bottom center)
Detection line
174
Note
A ratio of up to 30% can be set in [Object Size (%)] for passing detection.
Detection Status for Passing Detection
All moving objects detected are displayed with white profile lines.
When the [Decision Point] of a moving object that meets the [Object Size (%)] setting crosses a detection line in the
direction specified in [Passing Direction], the profile line changes to the same color as the detection line, and the
status becomes “detected”.
Notification of a passing detection event occurs only when the decision line is crossed. Take care in setting the
operation to be performed when an event occurs.
How to Configure Intrusion Detection
Set the area for which you want to detect intrusions.
The decision point is indicated by a cross on the detection frame of the moving object.
Important
Perform a detection test after configuring passing detection to make sure the detection frame of a moving object continues to be
displayed.
Object Size Indicator
1
In the video display area, draw the area in which you would like to detect intruding objects (P. 166).
2
Configure [Duration (Sec)] for the time required for an object to enter a detection area, and be detected as an
intrusion.
3
In [Decision Point], select the point of a moving object that will be used for triggering intrusion detection when the
moving object enters a detection area.
Setting Page
5
175
Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator representing the object size is shown for one second in
the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
Detection Status for Intrusion Detection
All moving objects detected are displayed with profile lines.
When [Decision Point] of a moving object larger than [Object Size (%)] enters a detection area and exceeds
[Duration (Sec)], its profile lines take on the same color as the detection area, indicating that “detected” mode has
been triggered.
Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)
Set operations to be performed upon detection of changes in a subject.
For details on settings, please refer to “Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)” (P. 178).
Checking Event Status
If the intelligent function (moving object detection, abandoned object detection, removed object detection, camera
tampering detection, passing detection, and intrusion detection) detects something, the event icon in that row turns green.
The detection status of video detection can also be checked in the Event and Input/Output menu of the Camera Viewer
(P. 73).
4
Configure the size of the moving object needed to trigger detection in [Object Size (%)].
Important
After the Intrusion Detection is set, please confirm that the system continues to show profile lines of the detected moving object.
Detection Frame
Decision point (bottom center)
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
Profile Lines of Detected Moving Object
176
No.1: Video Detection Status is ON
No.2 and 3: Video Detection Status is OFF
Displaying Settings for Detection Areas/Detection Lines, Non-Detection
Area and Detection Results (Display Options)
Configure the detection area/line, non-detection area, and detection results displayed in the video display area.
You can select the following for either [Detection Area/Line] or [Detection Results].
[Selected Detection Settings Only]
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results only for those detection settings selected in Detection Settings
(List).
[All Detection Settings]
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results for all detection settings in Detection Settings (List).
[Detection Settings of the Same Type]
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results for the same types of detection settings as those selected in
Detection Settings (List).
[Disable]
No detection areas/lines or detection results are displayed.
The following settings can be selected for [Non-detection Area].
[Only selected non-detection areas]
Only the non-detection areas selected in the Non-detection Area Settings (List) are displayed.
[All non-detection areas]
All the non-detection areas in the Non-detection Area Settings (List) are displayed.
[Only enabled non-detection areas]
Only the non-detection areas with [Status] set to [Enabled] in the Non-detection Area Settings (List) are displayed.
[Disable]
No non-detection areas are displayed.
Reducing Effects of Lighting Change (Detections Settings)
The Intelligent Function may not work when the entire screen is exposed to sudden changes in brightness, for example,
when indoor lights are turned on or off. Changing the detection settings may reduce this effect.
1
Click [Detection Settings].
Setting Page
5
177
The settings are saved and the Intelligent Function restarts.
Context Menu
Right-click on the video display area, Detection Settings (List) and Non-Detection Settings (List) to display a menu that
allows you to use the following functions. Unavailable functions will be grayed out when you right-click.
[Copy detection area/line]
Copy the detection area/line of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.
[Paste detection area/line]
Paste the copied detection area/line from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured. Paste cannot be used
with camera tampering detection.
Pasting a detection line is possible only when setting passing detection in the copy source and the paste target.
[Clear detection area/line]
Delete the detection area/line of the selected detection setting. If the shape of the area is rectangular, or the area is a
camera tampering detection area, the area cannot be deleted.
[Copy detection condition settings]
Copy the detection criteria of the selected detection setting to the clipboard. The detection settings name and display color
are not copied.
[Paste detection condition settings]
Paste the copied detection criteria from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured. Pasting is possible only if
the source and the target are the same detection type.
[Copy event settings]
Copy the event settings of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.
[Paste event settings]
Paste the copied event settings from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured.
[Copy non-detection area]
Copies a non-detection area that has been set to the clipboard.
[Paste non-detection area]
Pastes a non-detection area copied to the clipboard to the non-detection area that is being set.
[Clear non-detection area]
Deletes the non-detection area that is being set.
2
Select [Reduce effects of lighting change] checkbox.
3
Click [Save settings].
Important
It takes several seconds for the Intelligent Function to restart. No detection is performed while restarting.
Settings in [Reduce effects of lighting change] may not work depending on the operating environment. Repeated sudden
changes in brightness may also have the same effect. Perform a detection test to check whether settings work correctly.
178
This explains functions common to video detection.
Configuring Operations for “Detected” ([Event] Tab)
Set operations to be performed upon detection of changes in a subject.
(1) Specify Operation Timing (Multiple Selections Possible)
[ON Event Operation]
When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed when the mode becomes “detected”.
[OFF Event Operation]
When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed when “detected” mode ends.
[Detected mode Operation]
When selected, the operations set in (2) are performed while “detected” mode is active.
(2) Specify Event Operation (Multiple Selections Possible)
[E-mail Notification]
When selected, e-mail notification is sent according to the timing set in (1). [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] on
the Setting Page must be set in advance (P. 148).
[Video Record]
When selected, video recording begins according to the timing specified in (1). [Video Record] > [Upload] (P. 144) or
[Memory Card] > [Video Record Settings] (P. 196) on the Setting Page must be set in advance.
(3) Specify Audio Playback Timing
[Audio Playback at ON Event]
When selected, the sound clip specified in (4) is played back when the mode becomes “detected”.
[Audio Playback at OFF Event]
When selected, the sound clip specified in (4) is played back when “detected” mode ends.
(4) Sound Clip Settings
[Sound Clip Name]
Select the sound clip to be played back. You must register the sound clip with Sound Clip Upload 1 to 3 (P. 137) in
[Video and Audio] > [Audio] on the Setting Page in advance.
[Event] > [Intelligent Function]
- Shared Operations -
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
Setting Page
5
179
[Volume]
Set the volume for the sound clip.
(5) External Device Output Operations
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select this to start or pause output to an external device when the mode becomes “detected”, and to select the
operation (active or inactive).
[External Device Output for OFF Event]
Select this to start or pause output to an external device when “detected” mode ends, and to select the operation
(active or inactive).
Restarting Intelligent Function
If the background video has changed while you were specifying settings or detection results are not as specified, restart
the Intelligent Function.
1
If you have not yet obtained the camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges]
button and obtain the control privileges.
2
Click [Restart intelligent function].
Important
It takes several tens of seconds for the Intelligent Function to restart. No detection is performed while restarting.
180
When events trigger the switching of Day/Night Mode, presets registered in advance can be executed, such as changing
the camera angle or video quality settings.
Day/Night Mode Switching
[Preset when Switching to Day Mode]
Executes the preset when switched to Day Mode.
[Preset when Switching to Night Mode]
Executes the preset when switched to Night Mode.
Note
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 118).
You can set the timing for event-triggered Day/Night Mode switching in [Day/Night Mode Switching] in [External Device Input] (P. 150) or
[Timer] (P. 155).
[Event] > [Switch Day/Night]
Executing Presets When Switching Day/Night Mode
Important
When the user has camera control privileges, the presets for [Preset when Switching to Day mode] and [Preset when Switching to Night
Mode] will not run.
The following settings can be configured here.
Day/Night Mode Switching
Setting Page
5
181
By linking two types of events, a single event is triggered. Select AND/OR for the event linking method.
You can set the operations to perform, such as recording video or sending e-mail notifications, when a linked event is
triggered.
Note
You can check the linked event status on the [Event and Input/Output] menu of the Camera Viewer (P. 73).
Linked Event 1 to 4
You can register up to four linked events.
You can link the following events: [Volume Detection], [Scream Detection], [External Device Input], [Timer] and [Intelligent
Function].
[Linked Event]
Select whether to use a linked event.
[Event Linking Method]
Select the event linking conditions.
[AND]: A new linked event is triggered if both event types selected with [Event 1] and [Event 2] are triggered. Set [Event
Order] and [Event Gap] for this.
[OR]: A new linked event is triggered if either event type selected with [Event 1] or [Event 2] is triggered.
[Event Order]
You can select the order two events must be triggered when [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND].
If set to [None], the order will not be considered.
[Event Gap (seconds)]
Enter the interval between two events that must be triggered when [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND].
A new linked event is triggered if the second event triggers within the specified interval after the first event was triggered.
Event 1, 2
Specify the two events to be linked. The settings are the same for both.
[Event Type]
Select the event type for linking.
[Event] > [Linked Event]
Using Event Combinations
The following settings can be configured here.
Linked Event 1 to 4
Event 1, 2
•Operation
182
[Volume Detection]/[Scream Detection]
Select whether an ON event or OFF event triggers a linked event in [Volume Detection Status]/[Scream Detection
Status].
[External Device Input]
Select External Device Input in [External Device Input], and then select an active event or inactive event to trigger
a linked event in [External Device Input Status].
[Timer]
Select the timer event number to use in [Timer].
[Intelligent Function]
Select the Intelligent Function detection setting number (P. 162) to use in [Intelligent Function], then select whether
an ON event or OFF event triggers a linked event in [Intelligent Function Status].
Note
You cannot set the same event type for [Event 1] and [Event 2]. However, a combination of [Timer 1] to [Timer 4] can be set for
[Timer].
Also, a combination of [Input 1] and [Input 2] can be specified for [External Device Input].
Operation
Set the operations to be performed when linked events are triggered.
[ON Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to
their settings when a linked event is triggered (ON event).
[OFF Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset] ( ), [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to
their settings when a linked event is completed (OFF event).
[Ongoing ON Event Operation]
Select the operations to be performed during an ON event.
If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the
linked event.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a linked event is
triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Camera] > [Preset] (P. 118).
Note
[Preset] cannot be configured when [Intelligent Function] is included in [Event Type].
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the linked event.
If you select [Enable] and a linked event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination specified
in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [Video Record Action] (P. 144).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the linked event.
If you select [Enable] and a linked event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 148) beforehand.
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select the states of external device output when an ON event is triggered.
[External Device Output for OFF Event]
Select the states of external device output when an OFF event is triggered.
[Audio Playback at ON Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back when a linked event is triggered.
[Audio Playback at OFF Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back when a linked event completes.
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
Setting Page
5
183
Note
[Audio Playback at ON Event] and [Audio Playback at OFF Event] can only be set when [External Device Input] and [Intelligent
Function] is selected as [Event Type] in [Event 1] and [Event 2].
[Sound Clip]
Select the sound clip when [Audio Playback at ON Event] or [Audio Playback at OFF Event] has been set to [Enable].
You must upload the sound clip 1 to 3 with [Video and Audio] > [Audio] (P. 137) beforehand.
[Volume]
Enter the volume for the sound clip.
Linked Event Operation Examples
This shows linked event status examples according to the ON/OFF combinations for Event 1 and Event 2.
In the examples below, [Event Gap] is four seconds and each cell in the graphs below represents one second.
[Event Linking Method] Set to [OR]
Only One Event ON
Both Events ON
[Event Linking Method] is Set to [AND], [Event Order] is Specified
This shows examples when [Event Order] is set to [Event 1 -> 2].
When [Event Order] is set to [None] and [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND], linked events will be as in the
examples, even if Event 1 and Event 2 are switched.
When Events Occur in Order 1 -> 2
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
184
When Events Occur in Order 2-> 1 -> 2
Event 2 Triggered but Event Gap Setting ([4] sec.) Exceeded
Each Status of Event 1 Set to [OFF], ON States Do Not Coincide
One Event Switches Between ON/OFF
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Both events are ON, but their order of occurrence is
incorrect. Therefore, a linked event does not occur here.
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The gap between the occurrence of event 2 after the
occurrence of event 1 exceeds the value specified for the
[Event Gap] setting. Therefore, a linked event does not occur.
Event Gap (4 Sec. in This Example)
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The linked event does not occur when event 1
turns OFF, but at the moment event 2 turns ON.
Event Gap (4 Sec. in This Example)
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Event Gap (4 Sec. in This Example)
Setting Page
5
185
Separate access control from IPv4 and IPv6 addresses can be set.
Note
If the same address is duplicated, the address policy that is displayed highest on the list will be applied.
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions
Specify the hosts from which IPv4 access is permitted and prohibited.
[Apply Host Access Restrictions]
Select whether to use IPv4 host access restrictions.
[Default Policy]
Select whether to allow or block access from IPv4 addresses that have not been specified in [Network Address / Subnet].
[Network Address / Subnet]
Enter IPv4 addresses into the list and select [Yes] or [No] for access for each address.
You can specify the subnet to set access restrictions by network or host.
If set to [No], access to all ports is blocked.
[Security] > [Host Access Restrictions]
Setting Access Restrictions
Important
To prohibit access via a proxy server in HTTP connection, a proxy server address must be set.
If host access restriction is set mistakenly, access to the Setting Pages themselves may be prohibited, in which case restoring the
factory default settings will become the only means of recovery.
The following settings can be configured here.
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions
186
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions
Specify the hosts from which IPv6 access is permitted and prohibited.
[Apply Host Access Restrictions]
Select whether to use IPv6 host access restrictions.
[Default Policy]
Select whether to allow or block access from IPv6 addresses that have not been specified in [Prefix / Prefix Length].
[Prefix / Prefix Length]
Enter IPv6 addresses (prefixes) into the list and select [Yes] or [No] for access for each address.
You can specify the prefix length to set access restriction by network or host.
If set to [No], access to all ports is blocked.
Setting Page
5
187
Certificate creation and management, and encrypted communication settings.
Certificates
Create an SSL/TLS certificate.
[Create Self-Signed Certificate]
Enter the following items, click [Apply], and click [Exec] to create a self-signed certificate.
Follow the displayed message and reboot. The certificate created will take effect after rebooting.
Note
Creating a certificate takes time, so it is recommended that you stop video transmission and upload processes.
[Certificate Status]
If no certificate is installed, [Not Installed] will be displayed. If a certificate is installed, the validity period for the certificate
will be displayed.
[Country (C)]
Enter the ISO3166-1 alpha-2 country code.
[State/Province (ST)], [Locality (L)], [Organization (O)], [Organizational Unit (OU)], [Common Name (CN)]
Enter state/province name, locality, organization name, organizational unit and common name in alphanumeric characters
(spaces or printable characters).
Enter an FQDN format host name, etc. to set the common name (required).
[Validity Period Start Date], [Validity Period End Date]
Set the validity period of the certificate to be created (required when creating a self-signed certificate).
[Security] > [SSL/TLS]
Setting HTTP Communication Encryption
Important
Use a self-signed certificate when complete security does not need to be ensured, such as through operation tests. For system
operation, it is recommended that you acquire and install a certificate issued by a CA.
The following settings can be configured here.
Certificates
Certificate Management
Encrypted Communications
188
Certificate Management
Manage the SSL/TLS certificate.
[Generate Certificate Signing Request]
Click [Exec] to create a server private key and generate a certificate signing request.
Once processed, the certificate signing request will be displayed in a separate window.
Note
Generating a certificate signing request takes time, so it is recommended that you stop video transmission and upload processes.
[Display Certificate Signing Request]
Click [Exec] to view the details of the certificate signing request.
[Install Server Certificate]
Perform this operation to install a server certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
The certificate installed will take effect after rebooting.
[Install Intermediate Certificate]
Perform this operation to install an intermediate certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
The certificate installed will take effect after rebooting.
Note
To install an intermediate certificate and a cross root certificate, use a text editor or similar software to place them in the same file and
install them as an intermediate certificate.
[Delete Server Certificate]
Click [Exec] to delete the server certificate.
However, if SSL/TLS communications are enabled, the certificate cannot be deleted. Set [HTTPS Connection Policy] to
[HTTP] before deleting a certificate.
The deletion will take effect after rebooting.
[Delete Intermediate Certificate]
Click [Exec] to delete the intermediate certificate along with the cross root certificate.
However, if SSL/TLS communications are enabled, the certificate cannot be deleted. Set [HTTPS Connection Policy] to
[HTTP] before deleting a certificate.
The deletion will take effect after rebooting.
[Display Server Certificate Details]
Click [Exec] to view the details of the server certificate.
[Display Self CA Certificate]
Used for the purpose of testing SSL/TLS communications, but otherwise not normally used.
[Backup]
Click [Exec] to perform a backup of the certificates and private key. This can only be performed when [HTTPS] or [HTTP
and HTTPS] is set for [HTTPS Connection Policy] to perform SSL/TLS communication.
[Restore]
Installs the certificates and private key from backup.
Click [Browse] to specify the backup file, then click [Exec]. This can only be performed when [HTTPS] or [HTTP and HTTPS]
is set for [HTTPS Connection Policy] to perform SSL/TLS communication.
The restored certificate will take effect after rebooting.
Encrypted Communications
Set encrypted communications.
[HTTPS Connection Policy]
Set SSL/TLS communication with HTTPS connections.
Select [HTTP] if you do not want to perform SSL/TLS communication.
Select [HTTPS] or [HTTP and HTTPS] if you want to perform SSL/TLS communication. Connections using SSL/TLS are
enabled after rebooting.
Setting Page
5
189
If you select [HTTPS], HTTP access is also redirected to HTTPS to perform SSL/TLS communication.
Note
It may take a few minutes to generate an SSL/TLS key.
Depending on the type of the certificate being installed on the camera, a dialog box may be displayed indicating that the web browser
has accepted the certificate and a connection can be made. If the dialog box is not displayed, register the CA certificate in the web
browser.
Important
Even if you set SSL/TLS communication here, SSL/TLS communication is not performed unless you install a certificate.
Video distribution performance decreases when performing SSL/TLS communication. If you set [HTTPS], you cannot connect with the
RM.
190
Settings for 802.1X authentication and authentication status display, and for certificate management.
802.1X Authentication
Display the 802.1X authentication enable/disable control and status.
[802.1X Authentication]
Select this to enable or disable 802.1X authentication.
[Authentication Status]
Display the status of 802.1X authentication. There are three types of status: [Authenticated], [Unauthenticated], and [Stop].
Authentication Method
Set the authentication method used for 802.1X authentication.
[Authentication Method]
Select [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP] as the authentication method to use for 802.1X authentication.
[User Name]
Enter the user name used for authentication.
[Password]
Enter the required password for authentication.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].
Certificate Information
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].
[CA Certificate Status]
If no CA certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a CA certificate is installed, the validity period of the certificate
is displayed.
[Client Certificate Status]
If no client certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a client certificate is installed, the validity period of the
certificate is displayed.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Security] > [802.1X]
Network Port Authentication Settings
The following settings can be configured here.
802.1X Authentication
Authentication Method
Certificate Information
Certificate Management
Setting Page
5
191
[Client Private Key Status]
If no client private key is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a client private key is installed, [Installed] is displayed.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
Certificate Management
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].
[Install CA Certificate]
Installs a CA certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
[Install Client Certificate]
Installs a client certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Install Client Private Key]
Installs a client private key.
Specify the private key file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Client Private Key Password]
Enter the password for the client private key.
Required when a password has been configured for the private key.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Delete Certificate]
Deletes all installed CA certificates, client certificates, and client private keys.
Only “CA Certificate” is displayed when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [EAP-PEAP], but any installed client
certificates and client private keys are also deleted.
Important
If any CA certificates, client certificates, and client private keys already exist when installing certificates, they are discarded and new
versions are installed.
An error occurs if the format of the certificate or private key to be installed is incorrect.
Client certificates and client private keys are checked as a pair when installing, and an error occurs if they do not match.
The certificate and private key used for 802.1X authentication must be installed as separate items, irrespective of the installation status
of certificates for SSL/TLS.
192
Settings for using IPsec.
Note
If IPsec is used, video transmission performance drops.
IPsec
[IPsec]
Select the key exchange method when using IPsec.
[Security] > [IPsec]
Setting IPsec
Important
To run this camera with IPsec, the communicating devices and network must be set beforehand. Contact your system administrator for
these settings.
When connecting with IPsec, set the camera IP address manually.
For IPv4 addresses, use addresses with [IPv4 Address Settings Method] set to [Manual] in [Basic] > [Network] > [IPv4].
For IPv6 addresses, use addresses set with [IPv6 Address (Manual)] in [Basic] > [Network] > [IPv6].
If the IPsec setting is changed and the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser, a confirmation dialog box will
be displayed. Click [OK] to apply the new settings.
If you reboot the camera and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for connecting to the camera will
be displayed in a message.
If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your system administrator.
The following settings can be configured here.
•IPsec
Auto Key Exchange Settings
IPsec Set 1 to 5
Setting Page
5
193
Auto Key Exchange Settings
[IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm]
Select the IPsec SA encryption algorithm.
The specified algorithm will be checked for an applicable encryption algorithm starting from the left.
[IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm]
Select the IPsec SA authentication algorithm.
The specified algorithm will be checked for an applicable authentication algorithm starting from the left.
[IPsec SA Validity Period (min)]
Enter the duration of validity for IPsec SA.
[ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm]
Select the SA encryption algorithm for use with auto key exchange protocol IKE.
[ISAKMP SA Authentication Algorithm]
Select the SA authentication algorithm for use with auto key exchange protocol IKE.
[DH Group]
Select the key generation information that will be used in the DH algorithm for key exchange via auto key exchange protocol
IKE. The higher the group number, the stronger security will be.
[ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min)]
Enter the duration of validity for ISAKMP SA.
IPsec Set 1 to 5
IP security can be specified through auto key exchange or manual setting with up to five communicating devices.
Auto Key Exchange
Note
If auto key exchange is used, it will take approximately 5 to 10 seconds before communication with the camera starts.
[IPsec Set]
Select which IPsec sets the camera will use; IPv4, IPv6, or neither.
[IPsec Mode]
Select the IPsec mode.
[Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the connection destination.
[Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the source.
[IPsec Protocol]
Select the IPsec protocol.
If you select [ESP], enter only the setting items relating to ESP.
If you select [AH], enter only the setting items relating to AH.
If you select [ESP and AH], enter all setting items.
[Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the security gateway if [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
[Destination Subnet Mask Length], [Destination Prefix Length]
Enter the subnet mask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) when [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
Important
If the camera is rebooted during auto key exchange communication, a connection error may result after rebooting. If this occurs,
connect again.
194
[IKE Pre-Shared Key]
Enter the pre-shared key for IKE (auto key exchange).
Manual
[IPsec Set]
Select which IPsec sets the camera will use; IPv4, IPv6, or neither.
[IPsec Mode]
Select the IPsec mode.
[Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the connection destination.
[Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the source.
[IPsec Protocol]
Select the IPsec protocol.
If you select [ESP], enter only the setting items relating to ESP.
If you select [AH], enter only the setting items relating to AH.
If you select [ESP and AH], enter all setting items.
[Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the security gateway if [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
[Destination Subnet Mask Length], [Destination Prefix Length]
Enter the subnet mask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) when [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
If the Setting in [IPsec Protocol] Includes “ESP”
[SA ESP Encryption Algorithm]
Set the ESP encryption algorithm to suit the encryption algorithm supported by the device to connect to.
Normally [AES] or [3DES] is recommended.
[SA ESP Authentication Algorithm]
Set the ESP authentication algorithm to suit the authentication algorithm supported by the device to connect to.
If [ESP] is used alone, [No Authentication] cannot be selected.
[SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)]
Enter the SA encryption key for outbound.
If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm], set a 128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal
number, respectively. This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.
[SA ESP Authentication Key (outbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for outbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively. This item need not be set if [No Authentication] was selected.
[SA ESP SPI (outbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for outbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
[SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)]
Enter the SA encryption key for inbound.
If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm], set a 128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal
number, respectively. This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.
[SA ESP Authentication Key (inbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for inbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively. This item need not be set if [No Authentication] was selected.
[SA ESP SPI (inbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for inbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
Setting Page
5
195
Since this setting is used as an ID for identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an inbound SPI whose value is
already used in another ESP’s SPI.
If the Setting in [IPsec Protocol] Includes “AH”
[SA AH Authentication Algorithm]
Set the AH authentication algorithm to suit the authentication algorithm supported by the device to connect to.
[SA AH Authentication Key (outbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for outbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA AH Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively.
[SA AH SPI (outbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for outbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
[SA AH Authentication Key (inbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for inbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA AH Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively.
[SA AH SPI (inbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for inbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
Since this setting is used as an ID for identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an inbound SPI whose value is
already used in another AH’s SPI.
196
Settings for recording video to a memory card inserted in the camera. You can also see the status of the memory card.
[Memory Card] is the same as [Video Record] > [Memory Card]. Settings configured on one [Memory Card] page are also
reflected on the other.
Note
Memory card videos can be viewed and managed using the Recorded Video Utility. For information on operating the Recorded Video
Utility and its downloaded data, please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual”.
When a large number of files have been recorded onto a memory card, the Recorded Video Utility can take a considerable amount of
time to process the video list (the greater the number of files, the longer it will take). Please reduce the number of days saved in [Auto
Video Delete], or manually delete unneeded files with the Recorded Video Utility, on a regular basis.
The number of files saved on the memory card can greatly be reduced, by using H.264 as the video format, instead of JPEG.
The following memory cards can be used.
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card
microSD memory card, microSDHC memory card, microSDXC memory card
For inserting and removing the memory card, please refer to “Installation Guide”.
If you are using the memory card in the camera for the first time, format the memory card after inserting it into the camera (P. 198).
Video Record Settings
Sets whether to record video from the camera to a memory card or upload it with HTTP or FTP.
These can also be set with [Video Record] > [Upload] (P. 144) and will be reflected in [Video Record Settings] here.
[Video Record Action]
Select [Record to Memory Card] to record to a memory card.
Memory Card Operations
The setting items will change depending on the memory card status (unmounted/mounted).
[Memory Card]
Memory Card Operations and Information Display
Important
Information recorded to the memory card may be regarded as “personal information”. Take sufficient precautions for handling this
information when releasing the camera to third parties for disposal, transfer or repair.
The following settings can be configured here.
Video Record Settings
Memory Card Operations
Memory Card Information
HM4x
H730
S30
S31
S80x S90x
Setting Page
5
197
The memory card will be automatically mounted when you insert it into the memory card slot. It will also be automatically
mounted if it has been inserted in the memory card slot when the camera starts up.
[Mount/Unmount]
Click [Unmount] to unmount the memory card.
Be sure to unmount the memory card when turning off the power to the camera or removing the memory card.
Also click [Mount] with the memory card inserted to mount the memory card.
[Operation Settings]
Select the data to save to the memory card.
When [Save Logs and Videos] has been set, the following data is saved automatically.
Image files of recording-mode stream that could not be distributed due to a network error
Video files when HTTP or FTP upload failed
Video files manually recorded by the user from the Camera Viewer
Video files recorded by [External Device Input], [Volume Detection] and [Intelligent Function] when an event occurs
Video files recorded using a timer
•Log
Video recorded with ONVIF
Note
New files cannot be saved to the memory card if there is no free space. When [Overwrite videos] is set to [Enable], old video can be
deleted to save new video (P. 197).
[Video Format]
Select the video format to record to a memory card.
Video is recorded in this format when [Video Record Action] is set to [Record to Memory Card].
Video size and quality of the recorded video follow the settings in [Video] (P. 91).
Note
When set to [JPEG] and an upload error occurs, the frame rate of video recorded in JPEG format is always 1 fps.
When a network error occurs interrupting the transmission of recording-mode stream video, video is saved in the JPEG format
regardless of the [Video Format] setting (the frame rate is fixed at 1 fps).
[Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Pre-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered before the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video
Format].
Depending on conditions, however, saving the set number of frames or seconds may not be possible.
[Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Post-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264)
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered after the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in [Video
Format].
Depending on conditions, however, saving the set number of frames or seconds may not be possible.
[Overwrite videos]
Select whether to allow overwriting data when the available space on the memory card becomes too low while recording
video to a memory card due to an event being triggered.
If you select [Enable], videos recorded due to an event, timer or ONVIF will be overwritten starting from the oldest file.
Important
Be sure to perform the unmount process when turning off the power to the camera or removing the memory card. Failing to unmount first
may result in management file problems or the memory card becoming inaccessible.
You can use the Camera Management Tool to batch mount/unmount memory cards from multiple cameras.
Important
For [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)], the following settings must be configured in [Basic] > [Video] > [H.264(1)] (P. 92), [H.264(2)] (P. 93).
[Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control (constant bit rate)]
[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less
[I Frame Interval (sec)]: [0.5], [1] or [1.5]
You cannot select a different H.264 format from that in [Video Record] > [Upload] > [General Upload] > [Video Format] (P. 145).
198
If you select [Disable], use the Recorded Video Utility to delete unnecessary videos. For information on the procedure,
please refer to “Recorded Video Utility User Manual.”
[Auto Video Delete]
Select to automatically delete video from the memory card that has exceeded the [Days Saved] setting.
If you select [Enable], set [Days Saved] and [Delete Time].
[Days Saved]
Enter the number of days for which video recorded to the memory card should be saved.
[Delete Time]
Enter the time to delete video that has exceeded the [Days Saved] setting.
[Recreate Video Management Information]
If you click [Exec], the management information file for recorded video will be recreated on the memory card.
The memory card cannot be accessed during this process. It is also recommended that users not upload or stream video
from the camera.
When recreating video management information files, the more files you recreate, the longer the process will take; it may
require several hours.
[Format]
Click [Exec] to format the memory card.
Formatting erases all files and directories on the memory card.
Note
Formatting is performed using a quick format.
Memory Card Information
Displays the status of the memory card inserted in the camera and information about card capacity.
[Memory Card Recognition]
Displays the current status of the memory card.
[Memory Card Operation Status]
Displays the operation status of the memory card.
[Operable]: All operations are possible.
[Recreating video management information]: This status indicates that video management information is being recreated.
Other operations cannot be performed.
[Deleting videos]: This status indicates that videos are being deleted. Other operations cannot be performed.
[Video Management Information Status]
Displays the status of the video management information.
[Normal]: This status indicates that video management information is normal.
[Video Management Information Recreation Required]: This status indicates that management files are corrupted or not
consistent with saved video files.
It is necessary to click [Exec] in [Recreate Video Management Information] to recreate the management file.
If the management files are not recreated even when [Recreate Video Management Information] is used, [Format]
(P. 198) must be used.
[Video Saving]
Displays whether videos can be saved to the memory card.
[Cannot Save] may occur for the following reasons.
Memory card is not mounted.
The video management file is corrupted.
The card is write-protected.
The memory card is full and [Overwrite videos] is set to [Disable].
[Memory Card Capacity]
Displays the current capacity of the memory card.
[Used Capacity]
Displays the current used capacity of the memory card.
Setting Page
5
199
Check camera information, such as the firmware version, and perform maintenance on the camera system.
Device Information
[Model Name], [Firmware Version], [Serial Number], [Build Number] and [MAC Address]
Displays information about the camera.
Tool
You can configure/reboot the camera and display licenses.
[View Current Settings]
Display a list of current settings for the Setting Page.
[View License]
Display information on the third-party software licenses.
[Reboot]
Reboot the camera.
Initialization
Initialize the camera.
[Network Settings]
If you set this to [Save], the following settings are retained when initializing.
Administrator Name
Administrator Password
Network Settings
NTP Server
•HTTP Server
[Maintenance] > [General]
Displaying Camera Device Information and Perform
Maintenance
Caution
You must not turn off the camera while [Restore Default Settings] is in operation. Turning off the camera at this stage
may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.
Once [OK] is clicked, you can no longer stop the process of restoring the default settings.
The following settings can be configured here.
Device Information
Tool
Initialization
200
Host Access Restrictions
Time Zone
Certificates
Private Key
•IPsec
If you set this to [Do not save], the above settings are also initialized.
Since the administrator account is also initialized, you will become unable to connect to the camera. Use the Camera
Management Tool to configure the initial settings.
[Restore Default Settings]
The initial settings are restored according to the selection in [Network Settings] after rebooting.
Note
It is recommended that you back up each current setting before you click [Exec] in [Restore Default Settings].
The camera can also be restored to factory default settings using the reset switch. Note, however, that this will reset all camera settings
to factory default settings except for date and time (P. 225).
Setting Page
5
201
You can save/restore all the camera settings.
Backup / Restore
Configure the settings regarding backup and restoring.
[Save Destination]
Select the destination for saving the camera settings when backing up.
[Back Up Settings]
All settings, except date and time, will be backed up. The administrator account, certificates used by SSL/TLS and 802.1X
and private key will also be backed up.
[Restore Settings]
Restores all settings, except date and time, from the backup file created with [Back Up Settings].
If [PC] is selected in [Save Destination], click [Browse] to specify the backup file.
The administrator account, IP address, certificates used by SSL/TLS and 802.1X and private key will also be restored.
After restore is completed, the camera will be rebooted.
[Encryption Password]
Set the password to use when backing up and restoring. This is the password for encrypting the backup data itself.
When restoring from encrypted backup data, enter the password set when backing up.
Note
The settings are not restored if the password set when backing up and the password set when restoring do not match.
[Maintenance] > [Backup / Restore]
Saving/Restoring Camera Settings
Caution
You must not turn off the camera while [Back Up Settings] or [Restore Settings] are in operation. Turning off the camera at
this stage may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.
Important
Take care when restoring from the backup file of another camera, as problems such as not being able to connect to the camera may
occur due to the network address conflicting or the administrator password being overwritten.
When restoring the settings, do not use a backup file created with a firmware version newer than that of the camera to restore.
The following settings can be configured here.
Backup / Restore
202
You can update the firmware.
Device Information
[Model Name] and [Firmware Version]
Displays the information about the connected camera.
Update Firmware
Configure the settings related to firmware updates.
[Restore Default Settings]
The initial settings are restored when the firmware is updated.
If you set this to [Restore], the following settings are retained when initializing.
Administrator Name
Administrator Password
Network Settings
NTP Server
•HTTP Server
Host Access Restrictions
Time Zone
Certificates
Private Key
•IPsec
[Update Firmware]
Click [Browse], specify a firmware file for update, and click [Exec]. When the confirmation message is displayed, click [OK]
to start the firmware update.
The camera is rebooted after the firmware is updated.
[Maintenance] > [Update Firmware]
Updating the Camera Firmware
Caution
You must not turn off the camera while it is performing the [Update Firmware] operation. Turning off the camera at this
stage may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.
The following settings can be configured here.
Update Firmware
Setting Page
5
203
You can check the camera operations and connection history, and set log message e-mail transmission.
View Logs
Display a history of camera operations and connections.
[View Logs]
If you click [View], the log messages saved since the camera was started are displayed.
For details on log messages, please refer to “List of Log Messages” (P. 211).
Log Notifications
Set the mail server and e-mail address to use for log notification.
[Use log notifications]
If you select [Enable], the following setting items for log notification are displayed.
[Notification Level]
Select the log notification level.
For details on levels of log messages, please refer to “Log Messages on the Camera” (P. 211).
[Copy E-mail Settings]
Copies the e-mail settings used in [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 148). However, [Password] is not copied.
[Mail Server Name]
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
[Mail Server Port]
Enter the port number for the SMTP server (factory default setting is [25]).
[Sender (From)]
Enter the e-mail address of the sender.
[Recipient (To)]
Enter the e-mail address of the recipient.
[Authentication]
Select an authentication method suited to the destination SMTP server.
[Maintenance] > [Log]
Checking/Sending Camera Log Information
The following settings can be configured here.
View Logs
Log Notifications
204
[User Name], [Password], [POP Server]
Enter the user name and password needed for authentication, and the POP server host name or IP address when e-mail
authentication is set to [POP before SMTP].
Enter the user name and password needed for authentication when e-mail authentication is set to [SMTP-AUTH].
[Subject]
Enter the subject of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.
[Log Notification Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an e-mail notification test based on the settings currently entered.
If something other than [None] is selected for [Authentication], click [Exec] before clicking [Apply] after entering the
[Password].
Chapter
Appendix
This chapter provides supplementary information on camera functions, and explains the measures to take
when trouble occurs or a message is displayed during camera use. It also explains how to reset the camera to
the factory default setting state.
206
According to the setting item, you can specify parameters using modifier “% characters”.
Note
A runtime error will occur if the specified name does not match.
If this modifier is not defined, “%” will be deleted.
Modifiers
Modifiers
Meaning Description of character string entered
%n Reason for capture (number) 0 (test)
|
1 (External device input 1) | 2 (External device input 2) |
1 (External device input) |
33 (Timer 1) | 34 (Timer 2) | 35 (Timer 3) | 36 (Timer 4) | 145 (Volume detection) | 146 (Scream
Detection) | 161 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 1) |
162 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 2) | 163 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 3) |
164 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 4) | 165 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 5) |
166 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 6) | 167 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 7) |
168 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 8) | 169 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 9) |
170 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 10) | 171 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 11) |
172 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 12) | 173 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 13) |
174 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 14) | 175 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 15) |
201 (Linked Event 1) | 202 (Linked Event 2) | 203 (Linked Event 3) | 204 (Linked Event 4)
%N Reason for capture
(character string)
<External input device name (alphanumeric characters) > |
Intelligent Function Detection Setting name (alphanumeric characters) |
NULL (blank entry or interval timer test)
%O Reason for capture (ON/OFF) OFF | ON
%X Width of image Number of pixels in horizontal direction
%Y Height of image Number of pixels in vertical direction
%C Camera number 1
%D Camera Name Setting for [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)]
%P Pan position -180.00 – 180.00 0
%T Tilt position -90.00 – 90.00 0
%Z Zoom position 0.01 – 300.00
%R Rotation position 0
%V Camera server VB-H45/VB-M44/VB-H730F Mk II/VB-S30D Mk II/VB-S31D Mk II/VB-S800D Mk II/
VB-S900F Mk II/VB-S805D Mk II/VB-S905F Mk II
%y Year of capture time 2001 – 2031
%m Month of capture time 01 – 12
%d Day of capture time 01 – 31
%w Day of week of capture time 0 – 6 (Sunday to Saturday)
%H Hours of capture time 00 – 23
%M Minutes of capture time 00 – 59
%S Seconds of capture time 00 – 59
%s Milliseconds of capture time 000 – 999
%z Time zone of capture time -1200 – +1300
%a Weekday name of capture
time
Sun | Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat
%b Month name of capture time Jan | Feb | Mar | Apr | May | Jun | Jul | Aug | Sep | Oct | Nov | Dec
%h Host Name
HM4x
H730
S30
S31
S80x S90x
HM4x
S30 S31 H730 S80x S90x
HM4x
S30
S31
H730
S80x
S90x
Appendix
6
207
Available Modifiers
The modifiers that can be used for each setting item are specified below.
[HTTP Upload] (P. 145)
[Parameter (query string)]
All modifiers can be used.
[FTP Upload] (P. 146)
[Subdirectory Name to Create]
Only the modifiers %y, %m, %d, %w, %H, %h, %n can be used.
[File Name to Create]
Only the modifiers %y, %m, %d, %w, %H, %M, %S, %s, %n can be used.
[E-mail Notification] (P. 148)
[Message Body]
All modifiers can be used.
208
Before contacting the dealer from whom you purchased the product or Canon Customer Service Center, check the
following items. If a log message is displayed, check the details of the message and the corresponding countermeasures in
the log message list.
Note
For information on troubleshooting for the Camera Management Tool, Recorded Video Utility, and Mobile Camera Viewer, please refer to
each individual manual.
A problem caused by the security software may occur. Configure to exclude the camera, or the software where the problem occurred, in
your security software.
Troubleshooting
Problem Countermeasures
The camera does not launch. If you are using a PoE hub, check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.
If you are using an AC adapter (sold separately), check if the AC adapter is
connected correctly.
Turn the camera off and on again (please refer to “Installation Guide”).
Cannot connect to the camera. Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.
Check if the network to which the camera is connected is set up correctly. In
particular, check if the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway address are set
within the ranges supported by the applicable network.
If you have changed the IP address, the new address will not become effective until
the camera is rebooted.
Check if the correct URI (camera IP address) is entered in your web browser.
Check whether the connection is from a computer whose access is blocked in
[Security] > [Host Access Restrictions] (P. 185) on the Setting Page.
Ask your system administrator whether the authentication method set in [Security] >
[802.1X] (P. 190) on the Setting Page and the combination of [User Name],
[Password] and certificates match the rules of the network to connect to.
Configure to exclude the camera, or the software where the problem occurred, in your
security software.
The Camera Viewer will not launch. If the message “Your web browser is not supported.” is displayed, use Internet
Explorer 9 or greater, or a version of Chrome that is guaranteed to operate.
If the message “JavaScript is not available or disabled on your web browser.” is
displayed, click [Network and Internet] > [Internet Options] > [Security] > [Custom
level] in [Control Panel], and set [Active scripting] to [Enable].
To enable authorized users and guest users to use the Camera Viewer, specify the following
settings on the Setting Page.
Assign [Camera Control] or [Video Distribution] to authorized users/guest users in
[Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority].
Set [Basic] > [Viewer] > [General] > [Default Page] to [Display Viewer].
To also enable guest users to use the Camera Viewer, set [Basic] > [Viewer] >
[Viewer Settings] > [User Authentication] to [Do not authenticate].
Use one of the following procedures, when you launch the Camera Viewer and a file block
security warning is displayed because of an unverified publisher.
Launch the Camera Viewer after executing Windows Update to the latest version,
when using the camera in an internet connection environment.
Download the root certificate installer from the Canon download site on a
connectable computer and install it in the target environment, when in an
environment not connectable to the internet.
Cannot use some functions of the Camera
Viewer.
Follow the procedure in “Adding the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site” (P. 32) to
add this website to [Trusted sites] in the [Security] settings.
If you are using a web browser other than Internet Explorer or if the Canon Network
Camera Addon Module is not correctly installed when using Internet Explorer, the
following functions cannot be used.
Receiving/transmitting audio
Receiving/playing H.264 video
HM4x
H730
Appendix
6
209
Video is not displayed. The number of Viewers that can access the camera at the same time is restricted by
the setting in [Maximum Number of Clients] in [Server] > [Video Server] (a maximum
of 30 can be specified). If this restriction is exceeded, a message is shown and video
is not displayed.
Video can only be displayed by authorized users and guest users if [Video
Distribution] privileges are assigned. Ask your administrator to assign [Video
Distribution] privileges in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority].
If the Viewer is opened with Internet Explorer 10 or 11 on a 64-bit operating system,
H.264 video may not be able to be received or played if the camera is added to the list
of trusted sites and the enhanced protected mode is enabled. In this case, add the
camera to the list of trusted sites and disable the protected mode of trusted sites.
Configure to exclude the camera, or the software where the problem occurred, in your
security software.
There is no audio. If there is no audio, check the settings in [Video and Audio] > [Audio] on the Setting
Page as well as the sound and audio device settings for the computer.
If the Camera Viewer is used with administrator privileges, check whether the Viewer
using audio with the administrator privileges of RM Viewer, etc. is connected to the
camera.
Audio can only be used by authorized users and guest users if [Audio Distribution]
privileges are assigned. Ask your administrator to assign [Audio Distribution]
privileges in [Basic] > [User Management] > [User Authority].
If the Viewer is opened with Internet Explorer 10 or 11 on a 64-bit operating system,
the audio may not be able to be received or transmitted if the enhanced protected
mode is enabled. In this case, add the camera to the list of trusted sites and disable
the protected mode of trusted sites.
Audio input from the microphone will not be received because there is no sound sent
from the camera in the following cases.
While audio is being transmitted from the viewer to the camera or while an audio file
is being played back when [Audio Communication Method] is set to [Half Duplex]
in [Video and Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio] on the Setting Page
Configure to exclude the camera, or the software where the problem occurred, in your
security software.
The camera cannot be controlled. If you connect the Camera Viewer as an administrator, you will have exclusive
possession of the camera control privileges. If you connect to the Viewer as an
authorized user or guest user, you cannot control the camera unless the administrator
releases camera control. Consult the administrator (P. 43).
If the durability limit for pan/tilt operations is exceeded, the camera may not be able to
perform pan/tilt, focus, or zoom operations correctly (P. 56).
The viewer gets disconnected. Check the network and computer for abnormality.
Reboot the computer and connect again.
Connections from authorized users and guest users are disconnected while creating a
panorama image.
Configure to exclude the camera, or the software where the problem occurred, in your
security software.
You forgot the administrator password. You can initialize all settings of the camera excluding date and time using the reset
switch (P. 225). After performing initialization, use the Camera Management Tool to
register the administrator account again. The IP address and subnet mask, etc. also
need to be set again because the network settings are initialized.
Data cannot be uploaded. Check that the upload destination of [Video Record] > [Upload] and the upload
operation upon an event of the [Event] menu are both set correctly.
The settings for an upload destination that has been applied can be checked by
executing a server upload test in [Video Record] > [Upload] on the Setting Page
(P. 144).
Check [Maintenance] > [Log] > [View Logs] > [View Logs] or logs on the server to
check the detailed operating environment. For details on [View Logs], please refer to
“Uploader error” (P. 214), “Uploader warning” (P. 217), or “Uploader notification”
(P. 221) of “List of Log Messages”. Also please refer to “Important” on P. 144.
For the server settings, contact your system administrator.
Problem Countermeasures
HM4x
H730
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
210
Video cannot be recorded on a memory card. Check [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Information] on the Setting Page (P. 198).
Video cannot be recorded if the memory card has insufficient space and [Memory
Card] > [Memory Card Operations] > [Overwrite videos] is set to [Disable] on the
Setting Page (P. 197). Set [Overwrite videos] to [Enable] or use the Recorded Video
Utility to delete unnecessary videos.
To record video to a memory card when an event occurs, check the [Video Record
Action] settings under [Memory Card] > [Video Record Settings] on the Setting Page.
When [Video Record Action] is set to [Upload], change it to [Record to Memory Card].
When recording-mode stream video that could not be transmitted due to network
errors or video for which the HTTP/FTP upload failed is not stored on the memory card,
check [Operation Settings] under [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] on the
Setting Page. When [Operation Settings] is set to [Save Log], change it to [Save Logs
and Videos].
To manually save recordings to a memory card, obtain camera control privileges.
Files cannot be saved. Windows prohibits saving to certain folders. Accordingly, an attempt to save a file may
fail. Specify [Documents], [Pictures] and other folders.
Problem Countermeasures
Appendix
6
211
Log Messages on the Camera
The list of log messages displayed in [View Logs] in [Maintenance] > [Log] > [View Logs] on the Setting Page (P. 203).
Log messages are classified into the following types.
Note
If no content is recorded in a log for approximately two hours, “-- MARK --” will be recorded in the message area.
Error Log
System Error
S302 Error on saving settings [err]
S303 Error on saving settings [err]
S307 Error on saving settings [err]
S310 Working error in event service [err]
List of Log Messages
Category Level Code Fault level
crit Error 4xx Software-level failure (Task operations will stop)
err Error 3xx Operational error (Operations will continue)
warning Warning 2xx Non-operational error
notice Warning 1xx Error external to the system
info Information 0xx Information on normal operation
Description Can’t update system settings (S302)
Meaning An error generated while the system
was saving a setting. Setting could not
be saved.
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by
deleting unnecessary files in the user
memory area, etc.
Description Can’t update files of system settings
(S303)
Meaning An error generated while the system
was saving a setting. Setting could not
be saved.
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by
deleting unnecessary files in the user
memory area, etc.
Description (vbadmin.c XXX) Can’t update system
settings (S307)
Meaning An error generated while the settings
were saved by the setup protocol.
Setting could not be saved.
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by
deleting unnecessary files in the user
memory area, etc.
Description cannot work event [%1][%2][%3]
(S310)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An error occurred while the event
service was running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
212
S311 Working error in external input/output
service [err]
S312 Working error in timer service [err]
S320 PAN/TILT operation error [err]
S410 Event service initialization error [crit]
S411 External input/output service
initialization error [crit]
S412 Timer service initialization error [crit]
S413 Timer service runtime error [crit]
S420 External IO controller has failed [crit]
Description cannot work extio [%1][%2][%3]
(S311)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An error occurred while the external
input/output device service was
running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description cannot work timer [%1][%2][%3]
(S312)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An internal error occurred in the timer
service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description %1 error occurred. [%2] (S320)
%1 PAN | TILT
%2 Warning details
Meaning An error occurred during operation or
stopping of PAN/TILT.
Countermeasure Check that the camera is not touching
the dome, etc.
If the error is not caused by problems
such as contact with peripheral items,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description event initialization error [%1][%2]
(S410)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of
the event service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description extio initialization error [%1][%2]
(S411)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of
the external input/output device
service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description timer initialization error [%1][%2]
(S412)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of
the timer service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description timer working error [%1] (S413)
%1 Error number
Meaning An error occurred while the timer
service was running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description external io controller is broken.(S420)
Meaning The external IO controller has failed.
Countermeasure The external IO controller firmware
must be updated. If the problem
persists after updating the firmware,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Appendix
6
213
Audio server error
B301 Audio device error [err]
B402 Audio server initialization failed [err]
B403 Settings change failed [err]
Video error
V300 Video input error [err]
V320 Internal error in intelligent service [err]
V321 Pseudo mode setting error in intelligent
service [err]
V400 Video input initialization error [crit]
V401 Video input command error [crit]
Description cannot use audio device for
%1[%2:%3] (B301)
%1 Send/Receive type (rx | tx)
%2 Error type (open | write | flush)
%3 Error number
Meaning Detected an error in the audio device
Countermeasure If the problem persists, please arrange
for servicing.
Description wvaudio initialization error [%1] (B402)
%1 Error number
Meaning The audio server could not be
initialized. The audio server stops.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description cannot set config [%1:%2] (B403)
%1 Error notification number
%2 Error number
Meaning The settings could not be updated.
The audio server stops.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 warning - %2 (V300)
%1 Video number
%2 Error number
Meaning An error in the video input was
detected that may adversely affect the
operation of the camera.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description cannot work intelligent [%1][%2][%3].
(V320)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An internal error occurred in intelligent
service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description pseudo mode setting fail. (V321)
Meaning An error occurred in the pseudo mode
setting of intelligent service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 initialization failure - %2(%3)
(V400)
%1 Video number
%2 Process description
%3 Error details
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because the video input system could
not be initialized.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 command error - %2(%3)
(V401)
%1 Video number
%2 Process description
%3 Error details
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because a video input command could
not be processed.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
214
V402 Video input frozen [crit]
V403 Video input error [crit]
V420 Could not start intelligent service [crit]
V421 Intelligent service error [crit]
Uploader error
A470 Uploader initialization failed [crit]
Memory card error
M301 Memory card control module error [err]
M302 Cannot remove invalid file [err]
M303 Cannot process directory [err]
M304 Failed to recreate management
information [err]
M305 Error when writing a video file [err]
Description video %1 stalled (V402)
%1 Video number
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because video generation stopped.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 fatal error - %2 (V403)
%1 Video number
%2 Error number
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because an error that does not permit
recovery of the video input system was
detected.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description intelligent initialization error [%1][%2].
(V420)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning Failed to initialize intelligent service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description intelligent working error [%1][%2].
(V421)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error that does not permit recovery
occurred while intelligent service was
running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description uploader initialization failure - %1
(A470)
%1 Error number
Meaning The uploader could not be initialized.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description %1 process failure (M301)
%1 mount or unmount
Meaning Mount or unmount process failed.
Description Invalid file (%1) can not remove.
(M302)
%1 Name of removed file
Meaning The invalid file could not be removed.
Description Can not open directory(%1)(M303)
%1 Directory name
Meaning Could not open directory to be
processed.
Description Fail updating management
file(%1)(M304)
%1 Management information identification
number
Meaning Process to recreate management
information failed.
Description write error %1 (%2) (M305)
%1 Video file path
%2 Reason for error
Meaning An error occurred when writing a video
file.
Appendix
6
215
M400 Failed to initialize a memory card [crit]
ONVIF error (RTP)
R301 Distribution communication error [err]
R302 Parameter acquisition failure [err]
R303 Metadata distribution initialization
failure [err]
R304 Abnormal termination of client [err]
R304 Client disconnected [err]
R304 Client disconnected [err]
R305 RTSP processing error [err]
Warning log
System warning
S220 PAN/TILT operation warning [warning]
HTTP server warning
H143 User name specification error [notice]
Description Fail SD card initialization(%1).(M400)
%1 Card initialization NG (det), power
supplies control NG (proc)
Meaning Process to initialize a memory card
failed.
Description message queue open error. %1 (R301)
%1 Modules that generate errors
RTP_CTRL_QUEUE
RTP_DATA_QUEUE
VIDEO_CTRL_QUEUE
VIDEO_DATA_QUEUE
AUDIO_CTRL_QUEUE
AUDIO_DATA_QUEUE
EVENT_CTRL_QUEUE
RECVQ_META
SENDQ_MEDIA
Meaning A communication error occurred
between modules.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after repeated
attempts and rebooting, the camera
may be faulty. Arrange for servicing.
Description cannot get parameter: %1 (R302)
%1 user_account: User account
IP_address: IP address of the camera
profile_media_configuration:
MediaConfiguration information
RTSP_port_number: RTSP port number
Meaning Parameter acquisition has failed.
Description metadata initialization error (R303)
Meaning Metadata distribution initialization has
failed.
Description delete session from some kind of error:
client_IP=%1, session_ID=%2 (R304)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Session ID
Meaning The client session terminated
abnormally.
Description connection reset by peer:
client_IP=%1 (R304)
%1 Client IP address
Meaning Disconnected from client.
Description RTP/HTTP connection closed by client
(R304)
Meaning Disconnected from client.
Description RTSP Error: error_code=500: Internal
Server Error (R305)
Meaning An RTSP processing error occurred.
Description %1 warning detected. [%2] (S220)
%1 PAN | TILT
%2 Warning details
Meaning An error occurred during operation or
stopping of PAN/TILT.
Countermeasure Check that the camera is not touching
the dome, etc.
Description (http_auth.c.XXX) get_password failed,
IP:%1 (H143)
%1 IP address
Meaning An unknown user was specified in user
authentication. This log message may
also be displayed during normal
operations when using a web browser
other than Internet Explorer/Microsoft
Edge.
216
H144 Password specification error [notice]
H201 Timeout disconnect [warning]
wvhttp warning
W101 Invalid user name [notice]
W102 Invalid password [notice]
W130 Buffer recovered [notice]
W201 Invalid panorama image [warning]
W230 Buffer overflow [warning]
Audio server warning
B101 Received unusual request [notice]
B102 Client connection denied [notice]
B103 Client forcibly disconnected [notice]
B201 Event notification failure [warning]
Description (http_auth.c.XXX) password doesn’t
match for %1 username%2, IP:%3
(H144)
%1 URL XSS vulnerability countermeasure
implementation (process equivalent to
ftpd)
%2 User Name
%3 IP address
Meaning A wrong password was specified in
user authentication.
Description a request for %1 timed out after writing
%d seconds (H201)
%1 Request URI
%d 360 (Timeout time)
Meaning Disconnected due to HTTP server
timeout (360 sec.).
Description user <User name> not found (W101)
Meaning The camera was accessed by an
unauthorized user.
Description user <User name> password
mismatch (W102)
Meaning The password is invalid.
Description stream buffer recovered (W130)
Meaning Image buffer for stream recording has
recovered.
Description corrupt panorama image - ignored
(W201)
Meaning Panorama image information
acquisition failed.
Description stream buffer overflowed (W230)
Meaning The image buffer for the stream
recording overflowed and images were
discarded.
Description %1 unusual request[%2] (B101)
%1 Client host’s IP address
%2 Unusual type (400 | 404)
Meaning Refused due to command error (400)
and parameter error (404).
Description %1 request denied[%2] (B102)
%1 Client host IP address
%2 Denial type (41 | 43 | ...)
Meaning Client connection was denied due to
an authentication error (41), time
specification error (42), insufficient
resource (43), specification of
unsupported codec (45), specification
of unpermitted user level (47), too
many clients (49) or invalid operation
mode (4a).
Countermeasure 41: Check user name, password or
user list used when connecting.
42: Check playtime or maximum
connection time settings used when
connecting.
43: Reconnect or restart.
45: Use supported client software.
47: Check user level used when
connecting.
49: Check client number settings.
4a: Check if usage of audio server is
enabled.
Description %1 access denied[%2] (B103)
%1 Client host IP address
%2 Denial type (41 | 42 | 4a)
Meaning Connection was initially permitted, but
the setting has subsequently been
changed to prohibit access, thereby
triggering a forced disconnection (the
denial type is the same with B102).
Description cannot notify %1 event [%2] (B201)
%1 Event type (ald)
%2 Error number
Meaning Failed to notify event.
Appendix
6
217
B202 Event receive failure [warning]
B203 Audio message send failure [warning]
B204 Audio message receive error [warning]
Camera application warning
C201 Day/Night Mode switching warning
[warning]
C211 Camera control command overflow
[warning]
Video warning
V200 Video input warning [warning]
Uploader warning
A120 Resolution of upload destination name
failed [notice]
A121 Connection to upload destination failed
[notice]
A122 Connection to upload destination failed
[notice]
A134 Invalid upload setting (FTP/HTTP
mode) [notice]
Description cannot recv event [%1] (B202)
%1 Error number
Meaning Failed to receive event.
Description audio message send error %1 [%2]
(B203)
%1 Message type
%2 Error number
Meaning Failed to send audio message.
Description audio message recv error [%1:%2]
(B204)
%1 Error number
%2 Reason for error
Meaning Failed to receive audio message.
Description Can’t switch Day/Night mode, because
current mode is Auto.(C201)
Meaning Day/Night Mode could not be
switched.
Countermeasure Set Day/Night Mode to manual.
Description command queue overflowed (C211)
Meaning The camera control command queue
overflowed, and some commands
were discarded.
Countermeasure Allow a longer interval (200 ms) for
sending the camera control command.
Description video %1 warning - %2 (V200)
%1 Video number
%2 Error number
Meaning An error that permits recovery of the
video input system was detected.
Countermeasure Change video size or video quality, or
decrease data size for each JPEG
image.
Description uploader cannot resolve the server
name (A120)
Meaning The name of the upload destination
could not be resolved.
Description uploader cannot connect to the server
(A121)
Meaning Execution of connect to upload
destination failed.
Description uploader cannot connect to the server
(A122)
Meaning The upload destination could not be
connected due to a reason other than
A120 and A121.
Description ftp/http mode invalid. uploader set
<none> forcibly (A134)
Meaning The upload mode setting is invalid. The
upload function was forcibly disabled.
218
A135 Invalid upload setting (FTP PORT/
PASV mode) [notice]
A136 Invalid upload setting (HTTP
notification only/image mode) [notice]
A137 Invalid upload setting (E-mail
notification) [notice]
A138 Invalid upload setting (E-mail
notification authentication mode) [notice]
A274 Event buffer for upload overflowed
[warning]
A275 Image buffer for upload overflowed
[warning]
Memory card warning
M201 Memory card is write-protected
[warning]
M203 Not enough space on memory card
[warning]
M204 Invalid file removed [warning]
M205 Checking management information file
[warning]
M206 Invalid management information
removed [warning]
M207 Memory card removed without
unmounting [warning]
Description ftp port/pasv mode invalid. uploader
set <pasv> forcibly (A135)
Meaning The PORT/PASV mode setting in
connection with FTP upload is invalid.
The PASV mode was forcibly set.
Description http notice/image mode invalid.
uploader set <image> forcibly (A136)
Meaning The notification only/image mode
setting in connection with HTTP upload
is invalid. The image mode was
forcibly set.
Description mode invalid. uploader set <none>
forcibly (A137)
Meaning The e-mail notification setting is invalid.
Email notification was forcibly
disabled.
Description authentication mode invalid. uploader
set <smtp auth> forcibly (A138)
Meaning The setting for e-mail notification
authentication mode is invalid.
“SMTP_AUTH” was forcibly set.
Description event queue is full (A274)
Meaning Event buffer for upload overflowed.
Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the
number of event occurrences.
Description buffer queue is full (A275)
Meaning Image buffer for upload overflowed.
Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the
number of event occurrences. Also
adjust the video quality, video size and
frame rate for upload.
Description Readonly filesystem (M201)
Meaning A write-protected memory card is
inserted.
Description There is not available space (M203)
Meaning Insufficient memory card capacity.
Description Invalid file (%1) was removed. (M204)
%1 Name of removed file
Meaning An invalid file was removed.
Description %1 checking management file (M205)
%1 Start | Finish
Meaning The memory card may have been
removed without being unmounted.
Start/finish checking management
information file.
Description Invalid db information(%1)(%2) was
removed(M206)
%1 Name of management information file
containing invalid information
%2 ID of invalid information
Meaning Invalid management information was
removed.
Description Memory card was pulled before
unmount. (M207)
Meaning Memory card was removed when
mounted.
Appendix
6
219
ONVIF warning (RTP)
R101 RTP session timeout [notice]
R102 Information acquisition failure (RTP
payload size) [notice]
R102 Information acquisition failure (IP
address) [notice]
R103 RTSP authentication failure [notice]
R107 RTSP connection failure [notice]
Notification log
System notification
S001 System started [info]
S002 System settings changed [info]
S010 Event service started [info]
S011 Event service shut down [info]
S012 External device service started [info]
S013 External device service shut down
[info]
S014 Timer service started [info]
S015 Timer service shut down [info]
Description session timeout: session ID=%1
(R101)
%1 Session ID
Meaning RTP session has timed out.
Description cannot get parameter:
RTP_payload_size (R102)
Meaning Information acquisition has failed (RTP
payload size).
Description cannot get parameter: IP_address
(R102)
Meaning Information acquisition has failed (IP
address).
Description RTSP authorization error (R103)
Meaning RTSP authentication has failed.
Description RTSP Error: error_code=%d: Service
Unavailable (R107)
%d 400: Value used for RTSP is invalid.
401: RTSP authentication failure or
missing valid authentication
information.
457: Playback time for RTSP is invalid.
501: An invalid RTSP option was used.
503: Failure to offer service, due to
insufficient resources.
The number of maximum RTP
sessions, has passed the limit.
Meaning RTSP connection has failed.
Description starting paramd (S001)
Meaning Parameter management module
started.
Description Updated system settings. (S002)
Meaning Settings not requiring rebooting were
changed.
Description starting event (S010)
Meaning The event service was started.
Description shutdown event (S011)
Meaning The event service was shut down.
Description starting extio (S012)
Meaning The external device input/output
service was started.
Description shutdown extio (S013)
Meaning The external device input/output
service was shut down.
Description starting timer (S014)
Meaning The timer service was started.
Description shutdown timer (S015)
Meaning The timer service was shut down.
220
S017 qtimer service started or shut down
[info]
S070 Change to certificate [info]
wvhttp notification
W001 Starting and stopping of system [info]
W030 Startup and shutdown of WebView
Livescope Client [info]
W031 Transmitted video data size [info]
W040 Clearing to external memory [info]
Audio server notification
B001 Starting and stopping of audio server
[info]
B011 Audio client connected [info]
B012 Audio client closed [info]
Camera application notification
C001 Starting and stopping of camera control
module [info]
C002 Camera application started and
stopped [info]
Description %1 qtimer (S017)
%1 (starting) or (stopping)
Meaning The qtimer service was started or shut
down.
Description %1: succeeded to %2 certificate
(S070)
%1 ssl or 802.1X
%2 generate | load | delete | restore
Meaning A certificate was generated/loaded/
deleted/restored
Description %1 webview (W001)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning wvhttp server (webview) has started or
stopped.
Description %1%2 host=<Host>, user=<User>,
prio=<Priority>(W030)
%1 W: WebView session, V: Session-less
video client, N: Session-less event
client
%2 +: Connect, -: Disconnect
Meaning The camera server client was
connected or disconnected.
Description %1= host=<Host>, user=<User>,
video=<jpg|h264>:<Number of
frames> (W031)
%1 W: WebView session, V: Session-less
video client
Meaning When a client disconnected, the total
data that was sent to the client is
displayed in number of frames.
Description %1 the image storing - %2 (W040)
%1 Starting or stopping
%2 Reason for starting/stopping
Meaning Started or stopped clearing stream
recording to external memory.
Description %1 audio. (B001)
%1 starting | stopping
Meaning The audio server was started/shut
down.
Description [%1] %2 connected n=%3 (B011)
%1 Client type (send | recv)
%2 Client host IP address
%3 Total number of clients
Meaning An audio client was connected.
Description [%1] %2 closed n=%3 (B012)
%1 Client type (send | recv)
%2 Client host IP address
%3 Total number of clients
Meaning An audio client was disconnected.
Description %1 camerad (C001)
%1 starting | stopping
Meaning The camera control module started/
stopped.
Description starting cameraappl (C002)
Meaning The camera application started.
Appendix
6
221
Video notification
V001 Starting and stopping of video server
[info]
V020 Starting intelligent service [info]
V021 Shutting down intelligence service [info]
Uploader notification
A004 Starting and stopping of uploader [info]
A040 Number of uploads (MAIL) [info]
A041 Number of uploads (FTP) [info]
A042 Number of uploads (HTTP) [info]
Memory card notification
M001 Starting and stopping of memory card
control module [info]
M002 Valid management information
inserted [info]
M003 Started/finished recreation of
management information [info]
Description %1 video (V001)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning The video server was started/stopped.
Description starting intelligent. (V020)
Meaning Intelligent service was started.
Description shutdown intelligent. (V021)
Meaning Intelligent service was shut down.
Description %1 uploader (A004)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning The uploader was started or stopped.
Description uploader mail: normal=%1 test=%2
(A040)
%1 Number of normal uploads.
%2 Number of test uploads.
Meaning Shows the number of uploads
executed.
Description uploader ftp: normal=%1 test=%2
(A041)
%1 Number of normal uploads.
%2 Number of test uploads.
Meaning Shows the number of uploads
executed.
Description uploader http: normal=%1 test=%2
(A042)
%1 Number of normal uploads.
%2 Number of test uploads.
Meaning Shows the number of uploads
executed.
Description %1 sdctrl (M001)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning The memory card control module
(sdctrl) has started or stopped.
Description Valid db information (%1)(%2)(%3)
was inserted (M002)
%1 Name of management information file
with inserted valid information
%2 Directory number of valid information
%3 File number of valid information
Meaning Added to management information as
it appears to be a valid video file.
Description %1 updating management file
(%2)(M003)
%1 Start | Finish
%2 Management information identification
number
Meaning Process to recreate management
information finished.
222
ONVIF notification (RTP)
R001 Startup of RTP distribution module
[info]
R002 Stopping of RTP distribution module
[info]
R003 RTSP PLAY request received [info]
R004 RTSP TEARDOWN request received
[info]
R005 Starting multicast [info]
R006 Stopping multicast [info]
Description starting media_plane (R001)
Meaning RTP distribution module started.
Description stopping media_plane (R002)
Meaning RTP distribution module stopped.
Description PLAY received: client_IP=%1,
profile=%2,
num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4, A=%5,
M=%6,BC=%7) (R003)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested PLAY
%3 Total number of client sessions
%4 Total distribution count of Video stream
%5 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%6 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%7 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning RTSP PLAY request was received.
Description TEARDOWN received: client_IP=%1,
profile=%2,
num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4, A=%5,
M=%6,BC=%7) (R004)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested TEARDOWN
%3 Total number of client sessions
%4 Total distribution count of Video stream
%5 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%6 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%7 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning RTSP TEARDOWN request was
received.
Description start multicast: profile=%1,
num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3, A=%4,
M=%5,BC=%6) (R005)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested
MulticastStreaming START
%3 Total distribution count of Video stream
%4 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%5 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%6 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning Multicast was started.
Description stop multicast: profile=%1,
num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3, A=%4,
M=%5,BC=%6) (R006)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested
MulticastStreaming STOP
%3 Total distribution count of Video stream
%4 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%5 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%6 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning Multicast was stopped.
Appendix
6
223
Messages Shown in the Information Display
Messages shown in the information display of the Camera Viewer are classified into the following three types.
Warning Message
List of Viewer Messages
Icon Category Explanation
Information Message Displays help messages related to various buttons, pull-down lists, etc., as well as frame
rate and other information.
Warning Message Displays a message urging caution to the user when camera control privileges cannot be
obtained, the audio session stops, etc.
Error Message Displayed when a system error occurs in the viewer.
Message Explanation
The camera is busy. The connection limit was exceeded.
Failed to get camera control privileges. The request for camera control privileges was denied because the camera
was being used by the administrator, etc.
You are not connected to the camera. An attempt was made to operate the camera when the camera was not
connected.
Please get camera control privileges. An attempt was made to operate the camera without camera control
privileges.
Another user is already connected as an
administrator.
The administrator is already connected to the camera.
No audio device. The [Audio Reception] button or [Audio Transmission] button was clicked
while the computer audio device was unavailable or disabled.
Insufficient memory card capacity. An attempt was made to manually record to a memory card with insufficient
capacity.
Recording to memory card is not allowed. Recording to the memory card failed because [Memory Card Operations] >
[Operation Settings] was not set to [Save Logs and Videos].
You cannot control the camera unless you exit
Digital PTZ and Viewer PTZ.
The video display area was clicked with the Digital PTZ or Viewer PTZ
enabled.
Start Digital PTZ or Viewer PTZ. You clicked the pan/tilt slider, zoom slider, or video display area with the
Digital PTZ and Viewer PTZ disabled.
Waiting for control privileges. A general user is waiting to obtain control.
Recreating video management information. The video management information on the memory card is being recreated.
User authentication failed. User authentication failed, or the [Audio Transmission] button was clicked
with [Audio Distribution] cleared for an authorized user in [User Authority]
when connecting as an authorized user.
Failed to initialize the ActiveX plug-in. When the ActiveX plug-in is not installed after starting the Camera Viewer,
the Camera Viewer waits 10 seconds for the plug-in to be installed, but the
plug-in was not installed after 10 seconds.
JavaScript is not available or disabled on your
web browser.
JavaScript could not be used in the web browser.
Currently in the process of starting or ending
audio transmission and receiving.
Attempted to start or stop audio transmission while already processing
starting or stopping of audio transmission and reception.
HM4x
S30 S31
H730
S80x
S90x
224
Cannot be controlled, because it is set to fixed at
infinity mode.
You tried to operate the focus when [Focus] was set to [Fixed at infinity].
Cannot be controlled, because it is set to manual
mode.
You tried to operate the Back Light Compensation button or exposure
compensation when [Exposure] was set to [Manual], or [Smart Shade
Control] was set to [Auto].
You do not have video reception permission. A user without video reception privileges tried to connect to the camera.
Audio reception is restricted. You clicked the audio reception button when [Video and Audio] > [Audio] >
[Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] was set to [Disable].
Audio transmission is restricted. You clicked the audio transmission button when [Video and Audio] > [Audio]
> [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] was set to [Disable].
You clicked the [Audio Distribution] button while receiving audio when
[Audio Communication Method] was set to [Half Duplex] in [Video and
Audio] > [Audio] > [General Audio].
Your web browser is not supported. You started the Camera Viewer with an unsupported web browser.
ActiveX is disabled. ActiveX is disabled in the web browser settings or system functions cannot
be accessed from ActiveX due to security settings.
When this message is displayed while ActiveX is enabled, select the [Use a
proxy server for your LAN] checkbox in [Network and Internet] > [Internet
options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] > [Proxy server] in [Control
Panel], then specify the camera IP address in [Advanced] > [Exceptions].
Cannot be controlled, because the smart shade
control is set to auto.
The [BLC] button was operated when [Smart Shade Control] was set to
[Auto].
Message Explanation
HM4x
H730 S30
HM4x
H730
Appendix
6
225
If you have forgotten the settings and want to set the camera from the beginning, restore the factory default settings first.
It is recommended that you use [Maintenance] > [Backup / Restore] on the Setting Page to create a backup file before
restoring the factory default settings (P. 201).
Note
Settings can also be backed up using the Camera Management Tool. For details on using the Camera Management Tool, please refer to
“Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
For factory default settings, please refer to P. 227.
Restoring the Initial Settings from a Web Browser
Use [Maintenance] > [General] > [Initialization] > [Network Settings] > [Do not save] on the Setting Page (P. 199).
Restoring Factory Default Settings with the Reset Switch on the Camera
If you have forgotten or do not know the IP address of the camera or your Administrator password, you cannot operate the
camera via the network. In this case, press the reset switch to reset the camera.
The camera does not have a power switch. To turn the camera on or off, connect or disconnect the power cable.
The reset switch is located in a recessed area. Push the switch using the tip of a slender object such as a clip.
When the LED stops flashing, the reset procedure is complete.
Restoring Factory Default Settings
Important
If you restore default settings, you will become unable to connect to the camera because the administrator account is also initialized. Use
the Camera Management Tool to configure the initial settings.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Turn on the power while pushing the reset switch, confirm that the LED lights up, and then release the reset switch
after five seconds.
Reset Switch
LED
HM4x
226
Reset Switch
LED
LED
Reset Switch
H730
S30 S31 S80x
S90x
Reset Switch
LED
Appendix
6
227
List of Factory Default Settings
Item Setting
•LAN
LAN Interface Auto
Maximum Packet Size 1500
•IPv4
IPv4 Address Settings Method Auto (DHCP)
IPv4 Address 192.168.100.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
IPv4 Default Gateway Address
AutoIP Enable
IPv4 Address (AutoIP)
•IPv6
IPv6 Enable
Auto (RA) Enable
Auto (DHCPv6) Enable
IPv6 Address (Manual)
Prefix Length 64
IPv6 Default Gateway Address
IPv6 Address (Auto)
DNS
Name Server Address 1
Name Server Address 2
Set Name Server Address
Automatically
Use DHCP/DHCPv6
Host Name
Host Name Registration with
DDNS
Do Not Register
Search Domain
Search Domain List
mDNS
Use mDNS Enable
Administrator Account
Administrator Name
•User Authority
Authorized User Camera Control Video Distribution and
Privileged Camera
Control
Guest User Camera Control Video Distribution and
Camera Control
Authorized User Audio Distribution Yes
Guest User Audio Distribution Yes
Current Date and Time
Settings
Settings Method Set manually
Set NTP Server Settings
Automatically
Disable
NTP Server
Synchronization Interval
(minutes)
5
Last Sync Time
Time zone (GMT+09:00) Osaka,
Sapporo, Tokyo
Daylight Saving Time Disable
VB-H45/VB-H730F Mk II/VB-S30D Mk II/VB-S31D Mk II/
VB-S800D Mk II/VB-S900F Mk II
All Videos
Video Size Set 1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 /
480 x 270
•JPEG
Video Quality: 480 x 270 6
Video Quality: 960 x 540 6
Video Quality: 1920 x 1080 6
Video Quality: Digital PTZ 6
Video Size: video Transmission 1920 x 1080
Maximum Frame Rate: Video
Transmission
15.0
Video Size: Upload / Memory card 480 x 270
H.264(1)
Video Size 1920 x 1080
Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control
(constant bit rate)
Target Bit Rate (kbps) 3072
Video Quality 6
Frame Rate (fps) 15
I Frame Interval (sec) 1
H.264(2)
H.264(2) Disable
Video Size 480 x 270
Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control
(constant bit rate)
Target Bit Rate (kbps) 1024
Video Quality 6
Frame Rate (fps) 15
I Frame Interval (sec) 1
Item Setting
228
VB-M44/VB-S805D Mk II/VB-S905F Mk II
All Videos
Video Size Set 1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 /
320 x 180
•JPEG
Video Quality: 320x180 6
Video Quality: 640x360 6
Video Quality: 1280x720 6
Video Quality: Digital PTZ 6
Video Size: video Transmission 1280 x 720
Maximum Frame Rate: Video
Transmission
15.0
Video Size: Upload /
Memory card
320 x 180
H.264(1)
Video Size 1280 x 720
Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control
(constant bit rate)
Target Bit Rate (kbps) 3072
Video Quality 6
Frame Rate (fps) 15
I Frame Interval (sec) 1
H.264(2)
H.264(2) Disable
Video Size 320 x 180
Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control
(constant bit rate)
Target Bit Rate (kbps) 1024
Video Quality 6
Frame Rate (fps) 15
I Frame Interval (sec) 1
General
Default Page Display Settings Page
•Viewer Settings
User Authentication Authenticate
Rotate Video Display Do not rotate
H.264 for Guest Users Disable
Camera Name
Camera Name (alphanumeric
characters) VB-H45/VB-M44
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II
Item Setting
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
S30
VB-S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II/
VB-S805D Mk II
VB-S900F Mk II/
VB-S905F Mk II
Camera Control
Digital Zoom Disable
Enhanced Digital Zoom Disable
Maximum Digital Zoom
Magnification
5
Image Stabilizer Disable
Smart Shade Control Strength
(Auto)
Medium
Haze Compensation Strength
(Auto)
Medium
Motion-Adaptive Noise Reduction Disable
Pan/Tilt Speed Control Control by zoom
position
Day/Night (when Auto is set)
Switching Brightness Standard
Response (sec.) 20
Installation Conditions
Dome Disable
LED Setting Turn On
Video Flip Disable
Camera Position Control
Restricted to Presets No Restriction
Camera Position without Control Do not return to Home
Position
External Input Device 1
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
External Input Device 2
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
External Output Device 1
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
External Output Device 2
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
Camera Position
Item Setting
S31
S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
Appendix
6
229
Pan/Tilt/Zoom position Register
Digital PTZ Position Do Not Register
Camera Settings
Focus Auto
Manual
Exposure Auto
AGC Limit 6
Shutter Speed Limit (Lower) 1/30
Shutter Speed Limit (Upper) 1/16000
Shutter Speed 1/1000
Aperture 11
Gain 9
Exposure Compensation 0
Metering Mode Center-Weighted
Smart Shade Control Disable
Smart Shade Control Level 1 (Mild)
White Balance Auto
R Gain 255
B Gain 255
Noise Reduction Standard
Sharpness 3
Color Saturation 4
Haze Compensation Disable
Haze Compensation Level 4
Day/Night Auto
Day/Night Mode Focus
Day/Night Mode Focus Control Use One-shot AF
Light Source Fluorescent
Camera Control
Day/Night Auto
Panorama Creation Area
Specify the panorama creation
area
Not Specified
Capture Settings
Exposure Lock Center
White Balance Lock Do not lock
Focus Lock Do not lock
View restriction
View Restrictions Disable
Register Preset
Item Setting
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
S30
HM4x
S30
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
HM4x
S30
S31
Pan/Tilt/Zoom position Register
Digital PTZ Position Register
Camera Settings Register
Do Not Register
Preset Name preset 1
Show in Viewers Enable
Route List/Route
Conditions to Enable Settings Disable
Route Name
Specify Active Time Not Specified
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Reverse Route Disable
Edit Tour Route
Speed (PT) 20 (Fast)
Speed (Z) 8 (Fast)
Pause Duration 0
1
Specified Area
Area 1 (Pink) Disable
Area 2 (Purple) Disable
Area 3 (Blue) Disable
Area 4 (Cyan) Disable
Area 5 (Green) Disable
Area 6 (Yellow) Disable
Area 7 (Orange) Disable
Area 8 (White) Disable
•ADSR
Enable in H.264(1) Disable
Enable in H.264(2) Disable
Data Size Reduction Level High
On-screen display
Date display Disable
Position of date display Upper left
Format of date display YYYY/MM/DD
Time display Disable
Position of time display Upper left
Text display Disable
Position of text display Upper left
Item Setting
HM4x
S30
S31
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
S30
S31
H730
S80x
S90x
HM4x
H730
S80x S90x
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
H730
S80x S90x
HM4x
HM4x
HM4x
H730
S80x
S90x
230
Text string display
Common Settings
Color of text White
Background color Black
Color depth of text and
background
Fill text and
background color
Mask area
Area Enable
All privacy masks
Color Black
General Audio
Audio Input Disable
Input Volume 50
Output Volume 50
Echo Canceller
Disable
Audio Input Mode Line In
Audio Communication Method Full Duplex
Audio Server
Audio Transmission from the
Camera
Disable
Voice Activity Detection Disable
Audio Reception from Viewer Disable
Sound Clip Upload 1
Sound Clip Name
Sound Clip Upload 2
Sound Clip Name
Sound Clip Upload 3
Sound Clip Name
HTTP Server
Authentication Method Digest Authentication
HTTP Port 80
HTTPS Port 443
•SNMP Server
Use SNMP v1 and v2c Disable
Use SNMP v3 Disable
Administrator Contact Information
Administration Function Name
VB-H45/VB-M44
VB-H730F Mk II
VB-S30D Mk II
Item Setting
HM4x
H730
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
S30
VB-S31D Mk II
VB-S800D Mk II/
VB-S805D Mk II
VB-S900F Mk II/
VB-S905F Mk II
Installation Location
Security Level No authentication and
no encryption
Authentication Algorithm MD5
Encryption Algorithm DES
SNMP v1 and v2c Server
Community Name
•SNMP v3 Server
User Name
Security Level No authentication and
no encryption
Authentication Algorithm MD5
Encryption Algorithm DES
FTP Server
Use FTP Server Disable
User Name
•WS-Security
Check Time on Authentication Check
Video Server
Maximum Number of Clients 30
Camera Control Queue Length 30
Maximum Connection Time (sec.) 0
Camera Control Time (sec.) 20
RTP Server
RTP Enable
RTSP Authentication Method Digest Authentication
RTSP Port 554
Audio Multicast
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port 0
Multicast TTL 1
RTP Stream 1
Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*
Frame Rate 5
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
* 320 x 180 JPEG for VB-M44, VB-S805D Mk II and
VB-S905F Mk II.
Item Setting
S31
S80x
S90x
Appendix
6
231
Multicast Port 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
•RTP Stream 2
Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*
Frame Rate 10
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
•RTP Stream 3
Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*
Frame Rate 15
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
•RTP Stream 4
Video Size 480 x 270 JPEG*
Frame Rate 30
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
•RTP Stream 5
Video Size H.264(1)
Frame rate 5
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
Video Record Settings
Video Record Action Upload
General Upload
Upload Upload Disabled
Video Format JPEG
Frame Rate 1
Pre-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Post-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Pre-event Buffer (sec) 0
Post-event Buffer (sec) 0
Item Setting
HTTP Upload
Notification Notification Only with
HTTP
URI
User Name
Proxy Server
Proxy Port 80
Proxy User Name
Parameter (query string)
FTP Upload
Notification Video data upload with
FTP
FTP Server
User Name
PASV Mode Enable
File Upload Path
File Naming YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
ms
Maximum Number of Loops 0
Subdirectory Name to Create
File Name to Create image.jpg
File Name to Create video.mov
E-mail Notification
Notification Text Only
Mail Server Name
Mail Server Port 25
Sender (From)
Recipient (To)
Authentication None
User Name
POP Server
Subject
Message Body
External Device Output 1
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Output Format Continuous
Pulse Output Time (sec) 1
External Device Output 2
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Output Format Continuous
Pulse Output Time (sec) 1
* 320 x 180 JPEG for VB-M44, VB-S805D Mk II and
VB-S905F Mk II.
Item Setting
HM4x
H730
232
External Device Input
External Device Input Event Enable
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Event Operation Disable
Inactive Event Operation Disable
Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for Active
Event
Disable
External Device Output for Inactive
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at Active Event Disable
Audio Playback at Inactive Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Day/Night Mode Switching Disable
External Device Input 2
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Event Operation Disable
Inactive Event Operation Disable
Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for Active
Event
Disable
External Device Output for Inactive
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at Active Event Disable
Audio Playback at Inactive Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Day/Night Mode Switching Disable
Volume Detection
Volume Detection Event Disable
Detection Conditions The reference volume
level or above
Reference Volume Level 50
Detection Condition Duration
(sec)
0
ON Event Operation Disable
Item Setting
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
OFF Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Scream Detection
Scream Detection Event Disable
ON Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
•Timer 1
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Settings Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
Day/Night Mode Switching Disable
•Timer 2
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Settings Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
•Timer 3
Timer Event Disable
Item Setting
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
S30
S31
Appendix
6
233
24-Hour Continuous Settings Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
•Timer 4
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Settings Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
Display Options
Detection Area/Line Selected Detection
Settings Only
Non-detection Area Only enabled non-
detection areas
Detection Results Selected Detection
Settings Only
Camera Position Settings
Lock camera position Cleared
Day/Night Mode Switching
Preset when Switching to Day
Mode
None
Preset when Switching to Night
Mode
None
Linked Event 1
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order None
Event Gap (seconds) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
Item Setting
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30 S31
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
External Device Input Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Intelligent Function Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Linked Event 2
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order None
Event Gap (seconds) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
External Device Input Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Intelligent Function Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
Item Setting
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30
S31
234
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Linked Event 3
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order None
Event Gap (seconds) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
External Device Input Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Intelligent Function Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Linked Event 4
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order None
Event Gap (seconds) 2
Item Setting
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
External Device Input Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Intelligent Function Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions
Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable
Default Policy Authorize Access
Network Address / Subnet 01: / 32 Yes
02: / 32 Yes
03: / 32 Yes
04: / 32 Yes
05: / 32 Yes
06: / 32 Yes
07: / 32 Yes
08: / 32 Yes
09: / 32 Yes
10: / 32 Yes
11: / 32 Yes
12: / 32 Yes
13: / 32 Yes
14: / 32 Yes
15: / 32 Yes
Item Setting
HM4x
H730
HM4x
S30
S31
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
HM4x
H730
Appendix
6
235
16: / 32 Yes
17: / 32 Yes
18: / 32 Yes
19: / 32 Yes
20: / 32 Yes
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions
Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable
Default Policy Authorize Access
Prefix / Prefix Length 01: / 128 Yes
02: / 128 Yes
03: / 128 Yes
04: / 128 Yes
05: / 128 Yes
06: / 128 Yes
07: / 128 Yes
08: / 128 Yes
09: / 128 Yes
10: / 128 Yes
11: / 128 Yes
12: / 128 Yes
13: / 128 Yes
14: / 128 Yes
15: / 128 Yes
16: / 128 Yes
17: / 128 Yes
18: / 128 Yes
19: / 128 Yes
20: / 128 Yes
Certificates
Certificate Status Not Installed
Country (C)
State/Province (ST)
Locality (L)
Organization (O)
Organizational Unit (OU)
Common Name (CN)
Validity Period Start Date
Validity Period End Date
Encrypted Communications
HTTPS Connection Policy HTTP
802.1X Authentication
802.1X Authentication Disable
Item Setting
Authentication Status Stop
Authentication Method
Authentication Method EAP-MD5
User Name
•IPsec
IPsec Auto Key Exchange
Auto Key Exchange Settings
IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm AES->3DES
IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
IPsec SA Validity Period (min) 480
ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm AES->3DES
ISAKMP SA Authentication
Algorithm
SHA1
DH Group Group 14->Group 5->
Group 2
ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min) 480
IPsec Set 1
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
IPsec Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
Item Setting
236
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
IPsec Set 2
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
IPsec Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
IPsec Set 3
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
IPsec Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Item Setting
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
IPsec Set 4
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
IPsec Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
Item Setting
Appendix
6
237
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
IPsec Set 5
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
IPsec Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
Video Record Settings
Video Record Action Upload
Memory Card Operations
Operation Settings Save Logs and Videos
Video Format JPEG
Pre-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Post-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Pre-event Buffer (sec) 0
Post-event Buffer (sec) 0
Item Setting
Overwrite videos Enable
Auto Video Delete Disable
Days Saved 30
Delete Time 00:00
Initialization
Network Settings Save
Backup / Restore
Save Destination Memory Card
Update Firmware
Restore Default Settings Do Not Restore
Log Notifications
Use log notifications Disable
Notification Level Error
Mail Server Name
Mail Server Port 25
Sender (From)
Recipient (To)
Authentication None
User Name
POP Server
Subject
Item Setting
238
Numerics
802.1X Authentication ...................................... 190
A
Abandoned Object Detection .................. 158, 168
Access Restrictions ........................................... 43
Adjust Focus ............................................ 102, 108
Administrator ...................................................... 44
Administrator Account ....................................... 87
Administrator Password ..................................... 87
ADSR ................................................................ 126
AGC Limit ......................................................... 102
Aperture ........................................................... 103
Area Zoom ......................................................... 58
Audio Communication Method ........................ 136
Audio Detection ................................. 73, 152, 160
Audio Distribution ......................................... 44, 88
Audio Input ....................................................... 135
Audio Input Mode ............................................ 136
Audio Multicast ................................................ 142
Audio Reception ........................................ 70, 137
Audio Server .................................................... 136
Audio Transmission .................................... 70, 136
Authentication Method ............................. 138, 190
Authority ............................................................. 88
Authorized User ........................................... 44, 87
Auto Key Exchange ......................................... 193
Auto Video Delete ............................................ 198
AutoIP ................................................................. 84
B
Back Light Compensation .................................. 62
Back Up Settings ............................................. 201
Bit Rate Control .................................................. 92
C
Camera Angle .................................................... 37
Camera Control ............................................ 44, 88
Camera Control Privileges ................................. 55
Camera Control Queue Length ........................ 141
Camera Control Time ....................................... 141
Camera Management Tool ................................ 19
Camera Name .................................................... 96
Camera Operation
Day/Night ..................................................... 61
Exposure Compensation ............................. 61
Focus ........................................................... 61
Pan/Tilt ......................................................... 60
Pan/Tilt Speed ............................................. 60
Zoom ............................................................ 60
Zoom Speed ................................................ 60
Camera Tampering Detection .................. 159, 171
Camera Viewer ............................................. 39, 40
Certificate Information ...................................... 190
Certificate Management ........................... 188, 191
Client Certificate ............................................... 190
Color Saturation ............................................... 105
Control Privileges ............................................... 55
Current Settings ............................................... 199
Current Volume Level ....................................... 152
Custom Installation ............................................. 29
D
Data Size Reduction Level ............................... 128
Date .................................................................... 89
Day Mode ........................................... 61, 106, 108
Day/Night ..................................... 61, 97, 105, 108
Day/Night Mode Focus .................................... 107
Day/Night Mode Switching ............... 151, 156, 180
Daylight Saving Time ......................................... 90
Default Gateway Address ............................ 84, 85
Default Page ...................................................... 94
Detection Area ......................................... 161, 176
Detection Criteria ..................................... 152, 165
Detection Lines ........................................ 172, 176
Detection Type ......................................... 158, 162
Detections Settings .......................................... 176
Device Information ........................................... 199
Device Name ..................................................... 98
DHCP ................................................................. 83
DHCPv6 ............................................................. 84
Digital PTZ .......................................................... 64
Digital Zoom ................................................. 57, 96
Display Options ................................................ 176
Display Size ....................................................... 51
DNS .................................................................... 85
Dome .................................................................. 98
Drag to Move ..................................................... 59
Index
239
6
Appendix
E
Easy Installation ................................................. 29
Echo Canceller ................................................. 136
E-mail Notification 148, 150, 153, 154, 156, 178, 182
Encrypted Communications ............................. 188
Enhanced Digital Zoom ............................... 57, 96
Error Message .................................................. 223
Event and Input/Output
Audio Detection ........................................... 73
External Device Input .................................. 72
External Device Output ............................... 72
Image Detection .......................................... 73
Linked Events .............................................. 73
Event Display ............................................. 72, 175
Exposure .......................................................... 102
Exposure Compensation ............................ 61, 103
External Device Input ................................. 72, 150
External Device Output .................................... 149
External Input Device ......................................... 98
External Output Device ...................................... 98
F
Factory Default Settings ........................... 225, 227
Firewall ............................................................... 31
Firmware .................................................. 199, 202
Focus ......................................................... 61, 101
Format .............................................................. 198
Frame Rate ......................................... 92, 143, 145
FTP Server ........................................................ 139
FTP Upload ...................................................... 146
Full Screen Display ............................................ 52
Full Video Display Area .................................... 123
G
Gain .......................................................... 103, 105
Guest User ................................................... 44, 88
H
H.264 Video ......................................... 20, 51, 126
H.264(1) ............................................................. 92
H.264(2) ............................................................. 93
Haze Compensation ........................................ 105
Haze Compensation Level ............................... 105
Haze Compensation Strength ............................ 97
Home Position ............................................ 62, 118
Host Access Restrictions ......................... 185, 186
HTTP Port ......................................................... 138
HTTP Server ..................................................... 138
HTTP Upload .................................................... 145
HTTPS Connection Policy ................................ 188
HTTPS Port ....................................................... 138
I
I Frame Interval .................................................. 92
Image Detection ................................................. 73
Image Stabilizer ................................................. 97
Information Display ............................................ 50
Information Message ....................................... 223
Infrared Filter .................................................... 106
Initial Setting ................................................. 35, 99
Initialization ...................................................... 199
Input Volume .................................................... 136
Installation .......................................................... 28
Installation Guide ................................................. 5
Intelligent Function
Detections Settings .................................... 176
Display Options ......................................... 176
Event .......................................................... 178
Restart ....................................................... 179
Video Detection ......................................... 161
Intrusion Detection ................................... 159, 174
IPsec ................................................................ 192
IPv4 .................................................................... 83
IPv4 Address ...................................................... 84
IPv6 .................................................................... 84
J
JPEG ............................................................ 52, 92
L
LAN .................................................................... 83
Language Switch Button .................................... 76
LED .................................................................... 98
License ............................................................. 199
Linked Event .............................................. 73, 181
Lock camera position ....................................... 161
Log ................................................................... 203
Log Messages ................................................. 211
M
Main
Language .................................................... 47
Mobile Camera Viewer ................................ 47
Setting Page ................................................ 47
Switch Users ................................................ 47
Maintenance .................................................... 199
240
Maximum Connection Time ............................. 141
Maximum Digital Zoom Magnification ................ 97
Maximum Frame Rate ........................................ 92
Maximum Number of Clients ............................ 141
Maximum Packet Size ........................................ 83
mDNS ................................................................. 86
Memory Card ............................................. 18, 196
Memory Card Capacity .................................... 198
Memory Card Information ................................ 198
Message
Error Message ........................................... 223
Information Message ................................. 223
Log Message ............................................. 211
Warning Message ..................................... 223
Metering Mode ................................................. 103
Mobile Camera Viewer ............................. 5, 19, 23
Modifier ............................................................ 206
Motion-Adaptive Noise Reduction ..................... 97
Mounted ........................................................... 196
Moving Object Detection ......................... 158, 167
Multicast DNS .................................................... 86
N
Name Server Address ........................................ 85
Network .............................................................. 83
Network Address / Subnet ............................... 185
Night Mode ........................................ 61, 106, 109
Noise Reduction ............................................... 105
Non-Detection Area ................................. 163, 176
Notification ....................................... 145, 146, 148
NTP Server ......................................................... 89
O
One-shot AF ............................................. 102, 108
One-shot WB .................................................... 105
On-screen display ............................................ 129
Operation Mode ....................................... 149, 150
Operation Settings ........................................... 197
Output Volume ................................................. 136
Overwrite videos .............................................. 197
P
Pan ............................................................... 56, 59
Panorama ......................................................... 110
Panorama Display Panel .................................... 60
Panorama Screen ...................................... 79, 122
Parameter ......................................................... 206
Passing Detection .................................... 159, 172
Password ..................................................... 41, 87
Post-event Buffer ...................................... 145, 197
Pre-event Buffer ....................................... 145, 197
Prefix .......................................................... 84, 186
Preset ........................... 62, 66, 118, 150, 153, 182
Start Time Preset ....................................... 155
When switching Day/Night Mode .............. 180
Preset Name .................................................... 120
Preset Selection Menu ....................................... 62
Preset Tour ....................................................... 121
Privacy Mask .................................................... 131
Privileged Camera Control ........................... 44, 88
Pulse ................................................................ 149
R
Reboot .............................................................. 199
Reconnect .......................................................... 79
Recorded Video Utility ............................. 5, 19, 69
Recording Manually ........................................... 68
Recording to a Memory Card ............................. 68
Reference Volume Level .................................. 152
Removed Object Detection ...................... 158, 169
Reset Switch .................................................... 225
Restore ............................................................. 201
Restore Default Settings .................................. 200
Restore Settings ............................................... 201
RM-Lite ............................................................... 20
Rotate Video Display .......................................... 94
RTP ................................................................... 142
RTSP ................................................................ 142
S
Scream Detection ............................................ 153
Self-Signed Certificate ..................................... 187
Setting Menus .............................................. 76, 80
Setting Page ....................................................... 75
Sharpness ........................................................ 105
Shutter Speed .................................................. 103
Shutter Speed Limit .......................................... 103
Simple Camera Setting .................................... 100
Smart Shade Control ........................................ 104
Smart Shade Control Level .............................. 104
Smart Shade Control Strength ........................... 97
Snapshot ...................................................... 67, 79
SNMP Server .................................................... 138
Sound Clip Upload ........................................... 137
SSL/TLS Certificate .......................................... 187
Still Image .......................................................... 67
241
6
Appendix
Subnet Mask ...................................................... 84
Switching an Authorized User ............................ 42
T
Target Bit Rate ................................................... 92
Tilt ................................................................. 56, 59
Time ................................................................... 89
Time Zone .......................................................... 90
Timer ................................................................ 155
Tour Route Settings .......................................... 123
Troubleshooting ............................................... 208
Trusted Sites ...................................................... 32
U
Unmounted ...................................................... 196
Upload ............................................................. 144
User Account ..................................................... 87
User Authentication ...................................... 41, 94
User Authority .................................................... 88
User List ............................................................. 87
User Management ............................................. 87
User Name ................................................... 41, 87
User Page .......................................................... 82
V
Video and Audio
Audio Reception .......................................... 53
Audio Transmission ..................................... 53
Display Size Setting ..................................... 51
H.264 ........................................................... 51
Maximum Frame Rate ................................. 52
Video Size .................................................... 51
Video Detection ........................................ 158, 161
Video Display Area ...................................... 46, 78
Video Distribution ......................................... 44, 88
Video Flip ........................................................... 98
Video Format ............................................ 145, 197
Video Management Information ....................... 198
Video Quality ...................................................... 92
Video Record ................... 150, 153, 154, 155, 182
Video Record Action ................................ 144, 196
Video Saving .................................................... 198
Video Server ..................................................... 141
Video Size ............................................ 51, 92, 143
Video Size Set .................................................... 91
View restriction ................................................. 114
Viewer
Camera Viewer ...................................... 19, 39
Mobile Camera Viewer ............................ 5, 19
RM-Lite Viewer ............................................. 20
Viewer Message ............................................... 223
Viewer PTZ ......................................................... 63
Voice Activity Detection ................................... 136
Volume ......................................... 70, 71, 151, 179
Volume Detection ............................................. 152
W
Warning Message ............................................ 223
White Balance .................................................. 104
WS-Security ...................................................... 140
Z
Zoom ............................................................ 56, 59
BIE-7197-000
© CANON INC. 2017
205

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Canon VB-M641VE bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Canon VB-M641VE in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 6,63 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Canon VB-M641VE

Canon VB-M641VE Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 287 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info